1. DL manuals
  2. NEC
  3. Telephone Accessories
  4. ELECTRA ELITE IPK II
  5. User Manual

NEC ELECTRA ELITE IPK II User Manual

Summary of ELECTRA ELITE IPK II

  • Page 1

    Notice note that when converting this document from its original format to a .Pdf file, some minor font and format changes may occur. When viewing and printing this document, we cannot guarantee that your specific pc or printer will support all of the fonts or graphics. Therefore, when you view the ...

  • Page 3: Eatures

    F eatures and s pecifications m anual int-1072 (ipk ii) d ocument r evision 4c (v ersion 2100).

  • Page 5

    Nec unified solutions, inc. Reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features at any time without notice. Nec unified solutions, inc. Has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The information contained herein is the property of nec unified solutions, in...

  • Page 7: Preface

    Preface before reading this manual this manual provides detailed information for each of the system’s features. If you are not familiar with the features, the table of contents provides a list of the features and where to find the feature within the manual. G eneral i nformation congratulations! You...

  • Page 8

    Electra elite ipk ii programming manual this manual provides instructions for programming the electra elite ipk ii system using a multiline terminal or pc..

  • Page 9: Chapter 1

    Features and specifications manual i ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ table of contents chapter 1 introduction section 1 general information ...........................

  • Page 10

    ___________________________________________________________________________________ ii table of contents ___________________________________________________________________________________ document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii barge-in ...............................................................

  • Page 11

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c features and specifications manual iii ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ continued dialing ....................................

  • Page 12

    ___________________________________________________________________________________ iv table of contents ___________________________________________________________________________________ document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii elite callanalyst ......................................................

  • Page 13

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c features and specifications manual v ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ ipk ii voip management system ..........................

  • Page 14

    ___________________________________________________________________________________ vi table of contents ___________________________________________________________________________________ document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii pbx compatibility ......................................................

  • Page 15

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c features and specifications manual vii ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ station add-on console ...............................

  • Page 16: Chapter 3

    ___________________________________________________________________________________ viii table of contents ___________________________________________________________________________________ document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii wireless - dect ......................................................

  • Page 17

    Features and specifications manual ix ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ list of figures & tables figure 1-1 key assignment example ......................................

  • Page 18

    ___________________________________________________________________________________ x list of figures and tables ___________________________________________________________________________________ document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii figure 2-10 digital trunk clocking example 8 ...................

  • Page 19

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c features and specifications manual xi ___________________________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________________________ figure 2-21 pcpro connection dialog box ...............

  • Page 20

    ___________________________________________________________________________________ xii list of figures and tables ___________________________________________________________________________________ document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii table 3-3 service codes by feature ...........................

  • Page 21: Intr

    Features and specifications 1 - 1 intr oduction 1 introduction s ection 1 g eneral i nformation electra elite ipk ii (dth telephones), d term series i (dtr telephones), d term ipk (ith telephones), electra elite (dtu telephones), and d term series e (dtp telephones) can be used with the electra elit...

  • Page 22

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 1 - 2 introduction electra elite ipk ii terminal feature access, single on/off, or one-touch keys keys are designated feature access, single on/off, or one-touch throughout this manual. The keys operate much the same, but various limitations imposed on each ...

  • Page 23

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c introduction 1 - 3 d term series i terminals the d term series i terminals (dtr telephones) with or without lcd display offer a variety of colors and line sizes. Terminals are available in black or white. The large liquid crystal display (lcd) on display ter...

  • Page 24

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 1 - 4 introduction line sizes include 8-line and 16-line. Speakerphone with full-duplex handsfree operation and headset jack is standard. Terminals are compatible with ad(a)-2r and ps(a)-r. Electra elite and d term series e terminals the electra elite termin...

  • Page 25: Features

    Features and specifications 2 - 1 fe at u re s 2 features s ection 1 a bout t his c hapter this chapter provides an alphabetical listing of the features that are available with the electra elite ipk ii system. Each feature provides the following information: description – briefly describes the featu...

  • Page 26

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 2 features s ection 2 i mportant n otes simplifying multiline terminal operation with one-touch keys a multiline terminal user can access many features service codes (e.G., service code 629 leaves a message waiting for a co-worker). To streamline the ope...

  • Page 27: Ipk

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c features 2 - 3 s ection 3 ipk to ipk ii f eature c omparison l ist the following table provides a cross-reference between the electra elite ipk and the electra elite ipk ii features. Ipk feature name ipk ii feature name account code entry account code entry ...

  • Page 28

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 4 features automatic route selection (ars) automatic route selection automatic trunk-to-trunk transfer call forwarding, off-premise background music – multiline speaker background music background music over external speakers background music barge-in ba...

  • Page 29

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c features 2 - 5 not supported central office calls, answering not supported central office calls, placing class of service class of service clock/calendar display clock/calendar display co message waiting indication co message waiting indication co/pbx, tie l...

  • Page 30

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 6 features do not disturb (dnd) do not disturb door lock release relays door box door/monitor telephone door box dp to dtmf switching pulse to tone conversion drop key drop key d term analog cordless terminal not supported d term cordless ii terminal d t...

  • Page 31

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c features 2 - 7 flexible numbering plan flexible system numbering flexible ringing assignment ring groups flexible timeouts flexible timeouts not supported forced trunk disconnect full duplex handsfree handsfree and monitor full handsfree operation handsfree ...

  • Page 32

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 8 features not supported ip trunk – h.323 protocol not supported ip trunk – (sip) session initiation protocol not supported ip trunk (sip) – mg16 not supported ipk ii in-mail not supported ipk ii voip management system isdn-bri trunk connections isdn com...

  • Page 33

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c features 2 - 9 nec elite pc assistant ipk ii – pc assistant nesting dial not supported night call pickup night service night chime night service night transfer night service off-hook ringing off-hook signaling off-premise extension (opx) off-premise extensio...

  • Page 34

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 10 features not supported ringdown extension, internal/external ringing line preference line preference not supported room monitor route advance block trunk group routing save and repeat save number dialed scrolling directories directory dialing secondar...

  • Page 35

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c features 2 - 11 store and repeat memo dial stored hookflash speed dial – system/group/station synchronous ringing synchronous ringing system data up/down load pc programming t1 connection t1 trunking (with ani/dnis compatibility) not supported tandem ringing...

  • Page 36

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 12 features s ection 4 f eatures the remainder of this document provides the features for the electra elite ipk ii system..

  • Page 37: Account Code Entry

    Account code entry 2 - 13 a account code entry description account codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or restrict trunk calls. Optional account codes allow a user to enter an account code while placing a trunk call or anytime while on a call. The system doe...

  • Page 38

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 14 account code entry conditions if a user enters a code that exceeds 16 digits, the system ignores it. If the system has account codes disabled, the digits dialed (e.G., 1234 ) appear on the smdr report as part of the number dialed. Do not use in a pbx ...

  • Page 39

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c account code entry 2 - 15 pbx compatibility speed dial – system/group/station station message detail recording programming 14-01-11 basic trunk data setup – account code required enable (1) or disable (0) account codes for each trunk. 15-07-01 programmable f...

  • Page 40

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 16 account code entry 1. Dial . - or - press your account code key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: code 50). 2. Dial your account code (1~16 digits, using 0~9and # ). If account codes are hidden, each digit you dial shows an on the telephone display. 3. Dial . - o...

  • Page 41

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c account code entry 2 - 17 to enter an account code for an incoming call: this procedure is not available for single line telephones. 1. Answer incoming call. If account codes for incoming calls is disabled, the following steps dial digits out onto the connec...

  • Page 42

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 18 account code entry this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 43

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c account code – forced/verified/unverified 2 - 19 account code – forced/verified/unverified description account codes are user-dialed codes that help the system administrator categorize and/or restrict trunk calls. The system has two types of forced account c...

  • Page 44

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 20 account code – forced/verified/unverified operator notification to prevent account code abuse, the system can notify the operator each time an account code violation occurs (prg: 20-13-20). This happens if the user fails to enter an account code (if f...

  • Page 45

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c account code – forced/verified/unverified 2 - 21 when you use forced account code on only toll calls, and you dial a local call, you hear a beep. The timer set in 21-01-14 is applied to toll calls and local calls. Speed dial – system/group/station bins can c...

  • Page 46

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 22 account code – forced/verified/unverified station message detail recording programming 14-01-11 basic trunk data setup – account code required enable (1) or disable (0) forced account codes for each trunk. 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign a ...

  • Page 47

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c account code – forced/verified/unverified 2 - 23 operation to enter an account code anytime while on a trunk call: the outside caller cannot hear the account code digits you enter. You can use this procedure if your system has optional account codes enabled....

  • Page 48

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 24 account code – forced/verified/unverified 4. Dial . - or - press your account code key (prg 15-07-01 or sc 751: code 50). 5. Dial the number you want to call. If you hear “stutter” dial tone after dialing the number, ars is requesting you to enter an ...

  • Page 49

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c account code – forced/verified/unverified 2 - 25 to enter a forced account code at a single line telephone: 1. Access trunk for outside call. You can access a trunk by dialing a code. Refer to central office calls, placing for more information. With forced a...

  • Page 50

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 26 account code – forced/verified/unverified this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 51: Alarm

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c alarm 2 - 27 alarm description alarm lets any station extension work like an alarm clock. An extension user can have alarm remind them of a meeting or an appointment. There are two types of alarms: alarm 1 (sounds only once at the preset time) alarm 2 (sound...

  • Page 52

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 28 alarm programming 20-01-06 system options – alarm duration set the duration of the alarm signal (0~64800 seconds). Operation to set the alarm: 1. At the multiline terminal, press speaker. - or - at the single line telephone, lift the handset. 2. Dial ...

  • Page 53

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c alarm 2 - 29 to cancel an alarm: 1. At the multiline terminal, press speaker. - or - at the single line telephone, lift the handset. 2. Dial 727. 3. Dial alarm type (1 or 2). 4. Dial 9999. 5. At a multiline terminal, press speaker to hang up. - or - at the s...

  • Page 54

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 30 alarm this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 55: Alarm Reports

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c alarm reports 2 - 31 alarm reports description the ipk ii system logs various errors and reports information about the operation that can be used to determine the cause of a problem. The system can indicate several errors on the multiline telephone display, ...

  • Page 56

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 32 alarm reports table 2-1 sample alarm report 05/16/2006 14:30 page 001 lvl no stat date time item unit slt prt parameter min 0002 rec 05/16/06 14:21 pkg installation prt 02 00 maj 0010 err 05/16/06 14:21 isdn link prt 02 12 maj 0010 rec 05/16/06 14:21 ...

  • Page 57

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c alarm reports 2 - 33 table 2-2 alarm report definitions alarm report heading definitions lvl alarm type (maj = major, min = minor) no number of alarm (4-digit) stat status (rec = recovered, err = error, war = warning date date the alarm occurred time time th...

  • Page 58

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 34 alarm reports system information the system can print a report of the boards installed, the port assignments, and the port types. This information is sent to the extension defined in program 90-13. The system information reports indicate: date and tim...

  • Page 59

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c alarm reports 2 - 35 conditions alarm reports and system information reports can be output to ksu com port 1 or a ctu/ cta adapter. The ipk ii supports the following alarms to be output to the lcd of a multiline terminal: smdr buffer full cpu-lan link error ...

  • Page 60

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 36 alarm reports when using the e-mail functionality of reports, the e-mail address in program 90-11-10 (from address) must be set for the e-mail feature to work. Output of dim (debug) and alarm reports at the same time is not supported. Once output of n...

  • Page 61

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c alarm reports 2 - 37 required component(s) cta/ctu and available usb port - or - available rs-232 serial communications port related features none programming 15-02-19 multiline telephone basic data setup – cta data communications setup this program must be ...

  • Page 62

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 38 alarm reports 90-12-06 system alarm output – output mode 0 = manual (default) 1 = auto 90-24-01 system alarm report notification time setup – month set the month (00~12) (0 = disabled) 90-24-02 system alarm report notification time setup – day set the...

  • Page 63

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c alarm reports 2 - 39 for printing system information reports 90-13-01 system information output – output port type indicate the type of connection system information. 0 = no setting (default) 1 = com port (cpuii) 2 = -- not used -- 3 = lan port (cpuii) 4 = c...

  • Page 64

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 40 alarm reports 255.128.0.0 255.248.0.0 255.255.0.0 (default) 255.255.224.0 255.255.254.0 255.255.255.192 255.255.255.248 255.255.255.255 the setting of subnet mask is invalid when all host addresses are 0. If the network section is: 0, 127 128.0 191.25...

  • Page 65

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c alarm reports 2 - 41 90-11-08 system alarm report – to email address when alarm reports are to be e-mailed, set this e-mail address to which the report should be sent. Up to 255 characters default = no setting 90-11-09 system alarm report – reply address whe...

  • Page 66

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 42 alarm reports this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 67: Alphanumeric Display

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c alphanumeric display 2 - 43 alphanumeric display description multibutton display telephones have a 3-line, 24 character per line alphanumeric display that provides various feature status messages. These messages help the display telephone user process calls,...

  • Page 68

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 44 alphanumeric display programming 11-11-13 service code setup (for setup/entry operation) – display language selection for multiline terminal if needed, redefine the service code used to select the language for display multiline terminals (default: 678...

  • Page 69

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c analog communications interface (aci) 2 - 45 analog communications interface (aci) description the analog communications interface (aci) feature uses a pgd(2)-u10 adp (door phone/paging) adapter to provide two analog ports (with associated relays) for music ...

  • Page 70

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 46 analog communications interface (aci) auxiliary device control the pgd(2)-u10 adp can control a customer-provided tape recorder. When an extension user dials the aci analog port extension number, they can automatically start the recorder and activate ...

  • Page 71

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c analog communications interface (aci) 2 - 47 physical ports and software ports each pgd(2)-u10 adp consists of a physical port for connection to the telephone system and two logical ports. For programming, the ports are also called software ports. The physic...

  • Page 72

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 48 analog communications interface (aci) the devices connected to the pgd(2)-u10 adp must be compatible with the specifications below. Refer to the electra elite ipk ii system hardware manual for installation details. Default settings no pgd(2)-u10 adps ...

  • Page 73

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c analog communications interface (aci) 2 - 49 related features automatic call distribution (acd) background music hotline one-touch calling paging, external programming 11-06-01 aci extension numbering assign extension numbers to aci software ports. Select a ...

  • Page 74

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 50 analog communications interface (aci) 15-12-01 conversation recording destination for extensions – aci recording destination extension number assign the aci call recording destination per extension. The destination can be an aci port extension number ...

  • Page 75

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c analog communications interface (aci) 2 - 51 after you call an aci software port: if the port is set for input (program 33-01-01=1) and a music source is connected, you hear music. - or - if the port is set for output (program 33-01-01=2) and external paging...

  • Page 76

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 52 analog communications interface (aci) this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 77: Ancillary Device Connection

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ancillary device connection 2 - 53 ancillary device connection description ancillary device connection allows installation of selected peripheral (ancillary) devices to a multiline terminal. This feature enhances peripheral device objectives. An electra elit...

  • Page 78

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 54 ancillary device connection a single line telephone connected to an apr-u/ap(r)-r unit or apa-u/ap(a)-r unit cannot perform trunk-to-trunk transfer and does not support a conference with itself and two outside parties. A single line telephone connecte...

  • Page 79

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ancillary device connection 2 - 55 programming 15-03-01 single line telephone basic data setup – slt signaling type 15-03-04 single line telephone basic data setup – flashing operation depends on the connected ancillary device..

  • Page 80

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 56 ancillary device connection this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 81: Answer Hold

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c answer hold 2 - 57 answer hold description answer hold allows a multiline terminal user to press the flashing answer to answer an incoming ringing call or a camp-on call. When the multiline terminal user is already answering a call, the first call is automat...

  • Page 82

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 58 answer hold required component(s) not applicable related features answer key central office calls, answering programming 15-02-06 multiline telephone basic data setup – hold key operating mode 0 = normal common 1 = exclusive hold 15-07 programmable fu...

  • Page 83: Answer Key

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c answer key 2 - 59 answer key description multiline terminals have an answer key with an led that flashes when the multiline terminal user receives an incoming co/pbx, tie/did transfer, or co/pbx transfer call. When multiple calls are received, answer is used...

  • Page 84

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 60 answer key related features answer hold programming 22-02-01 incoming call trunk setup assign the incoming trunk type for each trunk. 22-04-01 incoming extension ring group assignment assign extensions to ring groups. 22-05-01 incoming trunk ring grou...

  • Page 85: Attendant Call Queuing

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c attendant call queuing 2 - 61 attendant call queuing description attendant extensions can have up to 32 incoming calls queued before additional callers hear busy tone. This helps minimize call congestion in systems that use the attendant as the overflow dest...

  • Page 86

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 62 attendant call queuing related features call forwarding programming 20-17-01 operator extension – operator’s extension number assign the operator (attendant’s) extension. 24-02-01 system options for transfer – busy transfer prevent (0) or allow (1) ex...

  • Page 87

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic call distribution (acd) 2 - 63 automatic call distribution (acd) description automatic call distribution (acd) uniformly distributes calls among agents of a programmed acd group. When a call rings into an acd group, the system automatically routes ...

  • Page 88

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 64 automatic call distribution (acd) the queue status displays shows: the number of calls queued for an available agent in the group. The trunk that has been waiting the longest, and how long it has been waiting. For each acd group, you can set the follo...

  • Page 89

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic call distribution (acd) 2 - 65 vrs delay announcements using in-mail with version 2000 or higher, in-mail can provide acd delay announcements. Any of the 16 (1~16) in- mail master mailboxes (prg 47-03-01) can be set to announcement mailboxes and ca...

  • Page 90

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 66 automatic call distribution (acd) during mode pattern 3~8, acd agents do not belong to any acd group and the acd extensions work as normal extensions. Example 2: log in with aic 567 during mode patterns 1~8, acd agents belong to only acd group 10. Exa...

  • Page 91

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic call distribution (acd) 2 - 67 emergency call if an acd agent needs assistance with a caller, they can place an emergency call to their acd group supervisor. Once the supervisor answers the emergency call, they automatically monitor both the acd ag...

  • Page 92

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 68 automatic call distribution (acd) incoming call routing incoming trunk calls can automatically route to specific acd groups. These types of calls ring directly to the acd group without being transferred by a co-worker or the automated attendant. Rest ...

  • Page 93

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic call distribution (acd) 2 - 69 supervisor, acd system you can designate an extension as an acd system supervisor. Once assigned as an acd system supervisor, the user can: take the all the system acd groups out of service simultaneously. Check the l...

  • Page 94

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 70 automatic call distribution (acd) enhanced supervisor options: an acd supervisor can individually assign extensions to acd groups, and set an agent’s status once assigned. This provides the supervisor with tremendous flexibility to reassign agents as ...

  • Page 95

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic call distribution (acd) 2 - 71 how often the time in queue portion of the display reoccurs (see the queue status display timing illustration below). Queue status display holding time. Queue status alarm enable/disable. Queue status alarm sending ti...

  • Page 96

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 72 automatic call distribution (acd) if a telephone is not idle, it cannot use the queue status display programmable function key. The queue status display is not shown and the queue alarm is not heard by acd agents those in off-duty mode. To scroll thro...

  • Page 97

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic call distribution (acd) 2 - 73 acd group as overflow destination the system can transfer an overflow call to a specific acd group, off-site via a speed dial bin, ring group or to voice mail using program 41-09-01. When program 41-08-02: acd overflo...

  • Page 98

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 74 automatic call distribution (acd) when voice mail delay announcements are being played, in-mail talk paths (ports) are used. In-mail cannot be used for acd night announcement. Program 41-08-03: acd overflow options – delay announcement source type is ...

  • Page 99

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic call distribution (acd) 2 - 75 required component(s) acd software license dsp-u10 unit in-mail (2 or 4) port flash drive (for delay announcements using in-mail) required software version 1100 or higher is required for delay announcements using aci....

  • Page 100

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 76 automatic call distribution (acd) 41-14-13-3 acd options – destination number (version 1600 or higher required) for each acd queue (1~64), assign the destination number for the assigned destination type. (up to eight digits). 41-14-14 acd options – dt...

  • Page 101

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic call distribution (acd) 2 - 77 aic agent log in to log in: multiline terminal 1. Press the acd log in/log out key (program 15-07-01 or sc 752: 10). - or - press speaker and dial the aic log in service code (program 11-13-08). 2. Dial the log in cod...

  • Page 102

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 78 automatic call distribution (acd) 1. Press the acd log in/log out key (program 15-07-01 or sc 752: 10). 2. Dial 0 to cancel the log out option. 3. Dial the agent identity code (aic) (up to four digits). The acd log in/log out key lights. - or - press ...

  • Page 103

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic call distribution (acd) 2 - 79 when logged out of acd group when acd agents are logged out and a call is placed into the acd queue, the telephones of the logged out agents display the queue status and they hear the alarm according to the settings d...

  • Page 104

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 80 automatic call distribution (acd) this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 105: Automatic Release

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic release 2 - 81 automatic release description automatic release drops the line circuit when an outside party abandons the call. For this feature to work with loop start trunks, the co/pbx providing the outside line must provide a timed disconnect si...

  • Page 106

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 82 automatic release related features central office calls, answering central office calls, placing programming 14-02-09 analog trunk data setup – busy tone detection 0 = disable (default) 1 = enable 14-02-14 analog trunk data setup – loop start/ground s...

  • Page 107: Automatic Route Selection

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic route selection 2 - 83 automatic route selection description automatic route selection (ars) provides call routing and call restriction based on the digits a user dials. Ars gives the system the most cost-effective use of the connected long distanc...

  • Page 108

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 84 automatic route selection hierarchical class of service control ars allows or denies call route choices based on an extension ars class of service. This allows lower classes of service (e.G., 1) to access routes unavailable to higher classes of servic...

  • Page 109

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic route selection 2 - 85 the examples below use the following system programming: program 26-02 for dial analysis table for ars set as: table no. Program 26-02-01 dial program 26-02-02 service type program 26-02-03 add data program 26-02-04 ars cos 1...

  • Page 110

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 86 automatic route selection program 26-01-03 for ars misdialed number handling as: 1 (warning tone) with program 26-01-06: ars cos match access disabled (set to 0): if at 9:00 am, each extension dialed 9+(203)926-5400 all extension would use trunk group...

  • Page 111

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic route selection 2 - 87 a system with automatic route selection cannot also have trunk group routing. With ars installed, trunk queuing automatically queues for the least costly route. The system automatically redials the queued call when the extens...

  • Page 112

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 88 automatic route selection speed dial – system/group/station trunk group routing trunk queuing/camp on programming 11-01-01 system numbering set the system internal (intercom) numbering plan. The numbering plan assigns the first and second digits diale...

  • Page 113

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic route selection 2 - 89 26-01-03 automatic route selection service – ars misdialed number handling if a user dials a number not programmed in ars, this option determines if the system should route over trunk group 1 (0) or play error tone (1). 26-01...

  • Page 114

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 90 automatic route selection 26-03-01 ars dial treatments – treatment code assign the dial treatments (1~15) for automatic ars dialing translation. Assign dial treatments to service numbers (trunk groups) in program 26-02. The ars dial treatment options ...

  • Page 115

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic route selection 2 - 91 44-02-03 dial analysis table for ars/f-route access – additional data if a service type is selected in prg 44-02-02, set the additional data, if required, for the pre-transaction table for selecting ars/f-route (24 digits max...

  • Page 116

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 92 automatic route selection 44-05-04 ars/f-route table – beep tone for each ars/f-route table (1~500) assign a priority number (1~4). Select whether or not a beep is heard if a lower priority trunk group is used. 0 = no beep 1 = beep 44-05-05 ars/f-rout...

  • Page 117

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c automatic route selection 2 - 93 44-09-01 weekly schedule for ars/f-route define a weekly schedule for using ars/f-route day numbers 1~7 (1 = sun, 7 = sat), pattern numbers (1~10). The pattern number is defined in program 44-08-01. 44-10-01 holiday schedule ...

  • Page 118

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 94 automatic route selection this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 119: Background Music

    Background music 2 - 95 b background music description background music (bgm) sends music from a customer-provided music source to the speakers of the multiline telephone when the station is idle. Conditions an aci [pgd(2)-u10 adp] port must be used as an alternate external music on hold or backgrou...

  • Page 120

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 96 background music system availability terminals all multiline terminals required component(s) externally provided music source. Pgd(2)-u10 adp if different external moh and bgm sources are required. Related features music on hold programming 10-38-01 b...

  • Page 121: Barge-In

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c barge-in 2 - 97 barge-in description barge-in permits an extension user to break into another extension user’s established call, including conference calls. This sets up a conference-type conversation between the intruding extension and the parties on the in...

  • Page 122

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 98 barge-in default setting disabled system availability terminals multiline and single line terminals required component(s) none related features call monitoring conference hold intercom off-hook signaling park programmable function keys programming 11-...

  • Page 123

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c barge-in 2 - 99 11-16-02 one-digit service code setup – barge-in set up item 02 for single digit barge-in. For example, you can assign item 02 to use digit 5 for barge-in. This allows you to program a function key with an extension number plus the barge-in c...

  • Page 124

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 100 barge-in to barge-in without first calling the busy extension: 1. Pick up the handset or press speaker. 2. Dial 710. - or - press barge-in key (prg 15-07-01 or sc 751: 34). 3. Dial busy extension. The extension user hears a warning tone. The disa use...

  • Page 125

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c battery backup – system memory 2 - 101 battery backup – system memory description the battery on the cpuii( )-u10 etu retains the clock/calendar and last number redial (lnr) buffers for each station when the cpuii( )-u10 etu encounters a power loss. With a f...

  • Page 126

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 102 battery backup – system memory system availability terminals not applicable required component(s) none related features battery backup – system power programming 90-03-01 save data 1 = save data use service code # #9 (default prg 11-15-03) to save th...

  • Page 127

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c battery backup – system power 2 - 103 battery backup – system power description a built-in battery provides complete system operating power for approximately 30 minutes during commercial power outages. When optional (locally provided) batteries are connected...

  • Page 128

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 104 battery backup – system power programming none operation none.

  • Page 129: Call Appearance (Cap) Keys

    Call appearance (cap) keys 2 - 105 c call appearance (cap) keys description this feature automatically places an outside call on a call appearance key when the system is operated as a hybrid (multifunction) system. These keys can be assigned on any multiline terminal or the same key can appear on mu...

  • Page 130

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 106 call appearance (cap) keys all flexible line keys on a multiline terminal can be assigned as cap keys in system programming. A conference call involving two outside lines cannot reside on one call appearance key. For call appearance (cap) keys, trunk...

  • Page 131

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call appearance (cap) keys 2 - 107 off-hook signaling programmable function keys secondary incoming extension user programming ability virtual extensions programming 14-05-01 trunk group – trunk group number assign trunks to trunk groups (1~100). 15-07-01 pr...

  • Page 132

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 108 call appearance (cap) keys operation to place an outgoing call on hold and retrieve it using a multiline terminal: 1. Use the handset to go off-hook, and wait for internal dial tone. - or - press speaker and wait for internal dial tone. 2. Dial the t...

  • Page 133: Call Arrival (Car) Keys

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call arrival (car) keys 2 - 109 call arrival (car) keys description call arrival (car) keys are software extensions available on the basic and expanded port packages. A call arrival extension assigned to a line key, can appear and ring on an individual stati...

  • Page 134

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 110 call arrival (car) keys related features virtual extensions programming 11-04-01 virtual extension numbering virtual extension ports (v-ports) = 1~256 virtual extension number = extension number 15-01-01 basic extension data setup – extension name as...

  • Page 135

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call arrival (car) keys 2 - 111 15-11-01 virtual extension delayed ring assignment ky01 mode1: 1 = yes 0 = no 15-18-01 virtual extension key enhanced options – virtual extension key operation mode 0 = release 1 = land on 15-18-02 virtual extension key enhanc...

  • Page 136

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 112 call arrival (car) keys to place a call to a call arrival (car) key: 1. Lift the handset, or press speaker. 2. Dial the car key extension, or press the call arrival (car) key. The operation depends on the setting in prg 15-02-21. To program a call ar...

  • Page 137: Call Duration Timer

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call duration timer 2 - 113 call duration timer description call duration timer lets a multiline terminal with an lcd time their trunk calls on the telephone display. This helps users that must keep track of their time on the telephone. For incoming trunk ca...

  • Page 138

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 114 call duration timer programming 20-13-36 class of service options (supplementary service) – call duration timer display enable (1)/disable (0) an extension call timer. 20-06-01 class of service for extensions assign a class of service (1~15) to an ex...

  • Page 139: Call Forwarding

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding 2 - 115 call forwarding description call forwarding permits an extension user to redirect their calls to another extension or an off-premise number. Call forwarding ensures that the user’s calls are covered when they are away from their work ...

  • Page 140

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 116 call forwarding personal answering machine emulation allows the extension to emulate an answering machine. Refer to voice mail for more information. Call forwarding reroutes calls ringing an extension, including calls transferred from another extensi...

  • Page 141

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding 2 - 117 a dss key indicates a call forwarding indication for extensions. When dnd and call forward are set on the same telephone, call forwarding does not work. (version 1100 or lower.) when dnd and call forward are set on the same telephone,...

  • Page 142

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 118 call forwarding if you do the following in sequence, set call forwarding busy on extension. Set call forwarding immediate on extension. Cancel call forwarding immediate on extension. Then, call forwarding busy/no answer is set back on extension defau...

  • Page 143

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding 2 - 119 related features call forwarding, off-premise call forwarding with follow me call forwarding/do not disturb override central office calls, answering department calling direct station selection (dss) console do not disturb programmable...

  • Page 144

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 120 call forwarding programming 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign a function key for call forwarding setup code (code 10~15). 20-06-01 class of service for extensions assign a class of service (1~15) to an extension. Program number name defaults...

  • Page 145

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding 2 - 121 20-09-01 class of service options (incoming call service) – second call for did/disa/dil/e&m override turn off or on an extension ability to receive a second call from a did, disa, dil, or tie line caller. 20-09-07 class of service op...

  • Page 146

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 122 call forwarding 2. Dial the call forward – immediate service code (default: 741). - or - at the multiline terminal only, press the call forwarding programmable function keys. (prg 15-07-01, 10 or sc 751, key code 10) 3. Dial 1 (set). 4. Dial the dest...

  • Page 147

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding 2 - 123 5. Press speaker or hang up. Refer to call forwarding, off-premise on page 2-133 . The call forwarding programmable function key turns on. To cancel call forward – busy/no answer at a forwarding station: 1. Pick up the handset or pres...

  • Page 148

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 124 call forwarding to set call forward – follow me from the destination station: 1. Pick up the handset or press speaker. 2. Dial the call forward – follow me service code (default: 746). - or - at the multiline terminal only, press the call forwarding ...

  • Page 149

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding 2 - 125 3. Dial 0 (cancel). 4. Dial the station number which is forwarded. 5. Press speaker or hang up. To set call forward busy/no answer for any extension to destination: 1. Pick up the handset or press speaker. 2. Dial the call forward bus...

  • Page 150

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 126 call forwarding 4. Press speaker or hang up. To set call forward – busy/no answer using a virtual extension: 1. Press the idle virtual extension key. 2. Dial the call forward – busy/no answer service code (default: 744). 3. Dial 1 (set). 4. Dial the ...

  • Page 151: Call Forwarding – Centrex

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding – centrex 2 - 127 call forwarding – centrex description the call forwarding – centrex feature allows a station to forward an incoming pbx/centrex co call to an outside location using the same pbx/centrex co line to free the line for additiona...

  • Page 152

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 128 call forwarding – centrex when dnd and any call forwarding – centrex is set, the call forwards immediately. (version 1500 or higher required.) call forwarding – centrex does not follow the code restriction of the stations. Default setting disabled sy...

  • Page 153

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding – centrex 2 - 129 programming 10-09-01 dtmf and dial tone circuit setup allocate the circuits on the cpuii etus for either dtmf receiving or dial tone detection. Prg 14-01-13 basic trunk data setup – loop supervision. Enable (1) loop supervis...

  • Page 154

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 130 call forwarding – centrex 24-09-07 call forward split settings – call forwarding destination for ctx/pbx for busy (version 1500 or higher required) 0~9, #, , p, r, @ (up to 24 digits) operation to activate call forwarding – centrex: 1. At a multiline...

  • Page 155

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding/do not disturb override 2 - 131 call forwarding/do not disturb override description an extension user can override call forwarding or do not disturb at another extension. This is helpful, for example, to dispatchers and office managers that a...

  • Page 156

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 132 call forwarding/do not disturb override 11-16-06 single digit service code setup – dnd/call forward override bypass customize the 1-digit service code used for dnd/call forward override. 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign a function key for c...

  • Page 157: Call Forwarding, Off-Premise

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding, off-premise 2 - 133 call forwarding, off-premise description off-premise call forwarding allows an extension user to forward their calls to an off-site location. By enabling call forward, off-premise, the user can stay in touch by having the...

  • Page 158

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 134 call forwarding, off-premise did calls to an extension with off-premise call forwarding set do not recall if there is no answer. Calls to extensions with dnd active do not follow call forwarding programming. Dil calls ring an idle department group me...

  • Page 159

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding, off-premise 2 - 135 related features call arrival (car) keys call forwarding code restriction direct inward dialing (did) do not disturb door box virtual extensions voice response system (vrs) programming 10-09-01 dtmf and dial tone circuit ...

  • Page 160

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 136 call forwarding, off-premise 11-11-47 service code setup (for setup/entry operation) – set/cancel call forward no answer (split) assign the call forward no answer (split) service code (default not assigned). 11-11-48 service code setup (for setup/ent...

  • Page 161

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding, off-premise 2 - 137 20-13-06 class of service options (supplementary service) – automatic off-hook signaling (automatic override) allow a busy extension to manually (0) or automatically (1) receive off-hook signals. 24-02-07 system options f...

  • Page 162

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 138 call forwarding, off-premise 20-06-01 class of service for extensions assign a class of service (1~15) to an extension. 20-07-05 class of service options (administrator level) – automatic trunk-to-trunk transfer enable (1)/disable (0) an extension us...

  • Page 163

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding, off-premise 2 - 139 13-04-01 speed dialing number and name – speed dialing data enter the common and group speed dialing numbers and names which are used for trunk-to- trunk forwarding. 14-01-04 basic trunk data setup – transmit gain level f...

  • Page 164

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 140 call forwarding, off-premise 501~548 = disa/vrs message 1000~1999 = speed dial bin number (000~999) if the transfer destinations are busy or receive no answer, those calls are transferred to the final transfer destination (program 22-10). Operation t...

  • Page 165

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding, off-premise 2 - 141 4. Dial 1 (internal) or 0 (external). 5. Dial trunk access code (default: 9) + number (9 + 2142622000). Trunk access codes are 9 (ars/trunk group routing), 704 + line group (1~9, 01~99 or 001~100) or #9 + line number (e.G...

  • Page 166

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 142 call forwarding, off-premise to cancel call forwarding off-premise for a door box: 1. At the multiline terminal, press speaker + dial sc 722. - or - at the multiline terminal only, press call forward (device) key (prg 15-07-01 or sc 751, code 54). - ...

  • Page 167

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding, off-premise 2 - 143 3. Dial trunk port number to be used (001~200). 4. Press speaker to hang up. Cancel automatic trunk forwarding: 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial 734. 3. Dial trunk port number to be used (001~200). 4. Press speaker to hang up...

  • Page 168

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 144 call forwarding, off-premise method 2 (follows the predefined destination in program 24-05-01) set automatic trunk forwarding: the speed dial bin must be defined in prg 13-04-01 for the line to forward. 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial 602. 3. Dial the d...

  • Page 169

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding – park and page 2 - 145 call forwarding – park and page description when an extension user is away from their phone, park and page can let them know when they have a call waiting to be answered. The personal greeting and park & page options c...

  • Page 170

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 146 call forwarding – park and page default setting park and page is available at default for internal paging access code 701, zone 1. Use access code of 713. See feature operation. Set prg 40-10-01 for vrs guidance message. System availability terminals...

  • Page 171

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding – park and page 2 - 147 31-03-01 internal paging group settings – internal paging group name assign names to internal paging groups (i.E., page zones). The system shows the names you program on the telephone displays. 31-04-01 external paging...

  • Page 172

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 148 call forwarding – park and page 6. Dial the park and page type: 2 = all calls 3 = outside calls only 7. Press speaker to hang up (or go on-hook at the single line telephone). To pick up your park and page: 1. Press speaker (or lift the handset at the...

  • Page 173

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding with follow me 2 - 149 call forwarding with follow me description while at a co-worker’s desk, a user can have call forwarding with follow me redirect their calls to the co-worker’s extension. This helps an employee who gets detained at a co-...

  • Page 174

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 150 call forwarding with follow me related features do not disturb programmable function keys programming 11-11-07 service code setup (for setup/entry operation) – call forwarding – follow me assign the service code of call forward follow me (default: 74...

  • Page 175

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call forwarding with follow me 2 - 151 3. Dial 0 (cancel all forward follow me). - or - dial the extension number with follow me set. To activate call forward follow me from a single line telephone: 1. At a single line telephone, other than your own, lift th...

  • Page 176

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 152 call forwarding with follow me this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 177: Call Monitoring

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call monitoring 2 - 153 call monitoring description call monitoring allows selected multiline terminal users to monitor another user’s conversation without the ability to participate. A programmable audible alert tone can be sent to that station user. Withou...

  • Page 178

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 154 call monitoring with program 20-13-10 set to 0, a call, which is barged into, can be placed on hold by the originator of the outside call. Both the outside caller and the extension, which is monitoring the call, are placed on hold. The handset and mi...

  • Page 179

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call monitoring 2 - 155 intercom park privacy (data) programmable function keys voice mail programming 11-12-08 service code setup (for service access) – barge-in determine what the service code should be for an internal party to use barge-in (default = 710)...

  • Page 180

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 156 call monitoring 20-13-45 class of service options (supplementary service) – mic key mode while call monitoring (call monitor mode) (version 1500 or higher required) use disable (0) for barge-in with alert tone or enable (1) to allow coaching. 20-14-1...

  • Page 181

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call monitoring 2 - 157 3. Dial a busy extension. If monitoring is not possible: the extension user hears a warning tone. The disa user is rerouted to the defined ring group. The tie line user hears a busy tone. To call monitor using coaching ability 1. Call...

  • Page 182

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 158 call monitoring this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 183: Call Redirect

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call redirect 2 - 159 call redirect description call redirect allows a multiline terminal user to transfer a call to a predefined destination (such as an operator, voice mail, or another extension) without answering the call. This can be useful if you are on...

  • Page 184

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 160 call redirect system availability terminals any multiline terminal required component(s) none related features none programming 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign a function key for call redirect (code 49 + destination extension number). 20-0...

  • Page 185: Call Waiting/camp-On

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call waiting/camp-on 2 - 161 call waiting/camp-on description with call waiting, an extension user may call a busy extension and wait in line (camp-on) without hanging up. When the user camps-on, the system signals the busy extension with two beeps indicatin...

  • Page 186

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 162 call waiting/camp-on required component(s) none related features callback off-hook signaling programmable function keys transfer trunk queuing/camp on programming 11-11-23 service code setup (for setup/entry operation) – second call for did/disa/dil ...

  • Page 187

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c call waiting/camp-on 2 - 163 15-02-12 multiline telephone basic data setup – off-hook ringing for each extension, set the off-hook ringing type. 0 = muted (default) 1 = none 3 = beep in speaker 4 = beep in handset 5 = speaker & handset beep 15-07-01 programm...

  • Page 188

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 164 call waiting/camp-on operation to camp-on a busy extension: 1. Call the busy extension. 2. Dial # or press the camp-on key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 35). 3. Do not hang up. To camp-on to a trunk, refer to trunk queuing/camp-on on page 2-999 . To cancel a...

  • Page 189: Callback

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c callback 2 - 165 callback description when an extension user calls a co-worker that does not answer or is busy, they can leave a callback request for a return call. The user does not have to repeatedly call the unanswered extension back, hoping to find it id...

  • Page 190

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 166 callback system availability terminals all stations required component(s) none related features call waiting/camp-on) programmable function keys programming 11-12-05 service code setup (for service access) – cancel camp-on if required, redefine the s...

  • Page 191

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c callback 2 - 167 operation to place a callback: 1. Call unavailable (busy or unanswered) extension. 2. Dial # or press the callback key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 35). 3. Hang up. 4. Lift the handset when busy extension calls you back. If the unavailable extensio...

  • Page 192

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 168 callback this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 193: Caller Id

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c caller id 2 - 169 caller id description caller id allows a display terminal to show an incoming caller’s telephone number (called the directory number or dn) and optional name. The caller id information is available as pre-answer display. With the pre-answer...

  • Page 194

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 170 caller id calls transferred from voice mail (unscreened) direct inward lines (dils) caller id temporarily stores 50 calls (total of abandoned and answered/unanswered). New calls replace old calls when the buffer fills. Temporary memory an unanswered ...

  • Page 195

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c caller id 2 - 171 add trunk access code to caller id with electra elite ipk ii wireless – phones electra elite ipk ii wireless – dect phones on the electra elite ipk ii can hold incoming call history. This history is created based on the caller id informatio...

  • Page 196

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 172 caller id option available for fsk or dtmf type from analog trunk an option (program 14-02-16) is available for the caller id which allows you to select the type of caller id signal from an analog trunk – fsk or dtmf. Conditions to have pre-answer ca...

  • Page 197

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c caller id 2 - 173 default setting disabled system availability terminals all multiline terminals with a display and single line telephones equipped to receive caller id required component(s) coib(4)-u( ) etu (in coid mode) coib(8)-u( ) etu (in coid mode) brt...

  • Page 198

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 174 caller id voice mail message indication on line keys programming 10-02-04 location setup – area code (version 1600 and 2100 or higher required) up to 6 digits (0~9, , #) (default not assigned). 10-02-05 location setup – trunk access code for electra ...

  • Page 199

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c caller id 2 - 175 14-02-16 analog trunk data setup – caller id type select the type of caller id signal from an analog trunk – fsk (0) or dtmf (1). By default, this option is set to 0. Trunks: 1~200 15-02-08 multiline telephone basic data setup – automatic h...

  • Page 200

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 176 caller id 20-09-04 class of service options (incoming call service) – notification for incoming call list existence determine whether or not the check list message is displayed to indicate a missed call (0 = off, 1 = on). 20-13-06 class of service op...

  • Page 201

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c caller id 2 - 177 operation storing a number to store a caller id number in an speed dial bin: 1. With an idle multiline terminal the display shows: 2. Press the list softkey. The display shows: 3. Press the cid softkey (caller id). The display shows: ## = l...

  • Page 202

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 178 caller id 6. Dial the speed dial bin in which the number is to be stored. If you press hold, the next available speed dial bin is used. The display shows: if all speed dial bins are used, the display shows table is full. 7. Press hold. The display sh...

  • Page 203

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c caller id 2 - 179 9. Press transfer. The display shows: 10. Press speaker. The telephone returns to idle. To store a caller id number in a one-touch key: 1. With an idle telephone the display shows: 2. Press the list softkey. The display shows: 3. Press the ...

  • Page 204

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 180 caller id 6. Press the one-touch key in which the number is to be stored or dial 1~9, 0. If you press hold, the next available one-touch key is used. The display shows: if all one-touch keys are used, the display shows table is full. 7. Press hold. T...

  • Page 205

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c caller id 2 - 181 to display caller id for a call in park: program 15-02-08 is set to 0 (preselect) for this feature. 1. With program 15-02-08 set to 0 (preselect) and a call in park, press the park key. (prg 15-07 or sc 752: 04). - or - with program 15-02-0...

  • Page 206

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 182 caller id this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 207: Caller Id Call Return

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c caller id call return 2 - 183 caller id call return description the caller id call return feature allows the voice mail system to use caller id information captured with the message to call and connect the person that left the message with the voice mail use...

  • Page 208

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 184 caller id call return when centralized voice mail is used, the remote voice mail user gets only caller id number when voice mail answers incoming co calls and performs an await-answer transfer to the remote user. A call that forwards to voice mail fr...

  • Page 209

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c caller id call return 2 - 185 system availability terminals all multiline terminals required component(s) vms(2)/(4)/(8)-u( ) etu fms(2)/(4)/(8)-u( ) etu vmp(2)/(4)/(8)-u( ) related features voice mail message indication on line keys programming none operati...

  • Page 210

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 186 caller id call return this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 211

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c central office calls, answering 2 - 187 central office calls, answering description the system provides flexible routing of incoming co (trunks) calls to meet the exact site requirements. This lets trunk calls ring and be answered at any combination of syste...

  • Page 212

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 188 central office calls, answering conditions the incoming ring group assignment programmed in prg 41-03-01 overrides the setting in prg 22-05-01. Ringing calls can be picked up regardless of access map programming. An extension user can lift the handse...

  • Page 213

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c central office calls, answering 2 - 189 related features automatic call distribution (acd) call forwarding directed call pickup direct inward dialing (did) direct inward line (dil) direct inward system access (disa) do not disturb group call pickup isdn comp...

  • Page 214

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 190 central office calls, answering 11-12-30 service code setup (for service access) – specified trunk answer if required, redefine the service code used to answer a specific trunk which is either ringing or on hold (default: 672). 14-01-02 basic trunk d...

  • Page 215

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c central office calls, answering 2 - 191 15-02-22 multiline telephone basic data setup – multiple incoming from intercom and trunk when this option is set to 0, incoming calls to an extension indicate on any hotline key for that extension as solid (busy). Whe...

  • Page 216

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 192 central office calls, answering 21-01-17 system options for outgoing calls – restriction digit in outgoing disable on incoming line with the outgoing disable on incoming line feature, determine the number of digits (0~9) to be dialed before the call ...

  • Page 217

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c central office calls, answering 2 - 193 22-08-01 dil/irg no answer destination if an incoming trunk call rings longer than the dil no answer time (program 22-01-04), it routes to the destination you specify in this option. Determine if the destination should...

  • Page 218

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 194 central office calls, answering 3. Select the ringing (1~8). 4. Press speaker to hang up..

  • Page 219

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c central office calls, placing 2 - 195 central office calls, placing description the system provides flexibility in the way each extension user can place outgoing trunk calls. This lets you customize the call placing options to meet site requirements and each...

  • Page 220

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 196 central office calls, placing with automatic handsfree, an extension user can press a line key to place a trunk call without having to first lift the handset or press speaker. Users without automatic handsfree can preselect a line key before they lif...

  • Page 221

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c central office calls, placing 2 - 197 handsfree long conversation cutoff microphone cutoff programmable function keys trunk group routing trunk groups programming 10-03-03 etu setup (for sli pkg setup) – transmit gain level (s-level) 10-03-04 etu setup (for ...

  • Page 222

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 198 central office calls, placing 14-01-07 basic trunk data setup – outgoing calls for each trunk, allow (1) or prevent (0) outgoing calls. 14-01-10 basic trunk data setup – dtmf tones for outgoing calls for each trunk, enable (1)/disable (0) an extensio...

  • Page 223

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c central office calls, placing 2 - 199 15-02-01 multiline telephone basic data setup – display language selection select the language used on a multiline terminal display: 15-02-08 multiline telephone basic data setup – automatic handsfree determine if when a...

  • Page 224

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 200 central office calls, placing 21-01-15 system options for outgoing calls – outgoing disable on incoming line (toll restriction) enable (1)/disable (0) the outgoing disable on incoming line feature. 21-01-16 system options for outgoing calls – supervi...

  • Page 225

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c central office calls, placing 2 - 201 to place a call using trunk group routing: 1. Go off-hook. 2. Dial 9. If your system has an alternate trunk route access code, you may dial that instead. 3. Dial the number. - or - 1. At the multiline terminal, press the...

  • Page 226

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 202 central office calls, placing this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 227: Class of Service

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c class of service 2 - 203 class of service description class of service (cos) sets various features and dialing options (called items) for extensions. The system allows any number of extensions to share the same class of service. An extension can have a diffe...

  • Page 228

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 204 class of service default setting the attendant (extension 101) has class of service 15 in all night service modes. All other extensions have class of service 1 in all night service modes. Refer to table 2-6 through table 2-13 in this section for the ...

  • Page 229

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c class of service 2 - 205 20-07 class of service options (administrator level) refer to table 2-6 class of service options (administrator level), program 20-07 on page 2-205 . 20-08 class of service options (outgoing call service) refer to table 2-7 class of ...

  • Page 230

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 206 class of service 03 time setting turn off or on an extension user ability to set the time via service code 728. 0 = off 1 = on 1 1 11-10-03 04 storing speed dialing entries turn off or on an extension user ability to store system or group speed diali...

  • Page 231

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c class of service 2 - 207 19 smdr printout department group (stg) data 0 = off 1 = on 0 1 11-10-24 20 smdr printout accumulated account code data 0 = off 1 = on 0 1 11-10-25 21 register/delete dect turn off or on an extension user ability to register or unreg...

  • Page 232

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 208 class of service 05 dial number preview (preset dial) turn off or on an extension user ability to use dial number preview. 0 = off 1 = on 1 1 06 toll restriction override turn off or on toll restricting override (service code 663). 0 = off 1 = on 0 0...

  • Page 233

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c class of service 2 - 209 16 display e911 dialed extension name and number turn off or on an extension ability to display the name and number of the extension that dialed 911. 0 = off 1 = on 0 0 17 ars override of trunk access map turn off or on an extension ...

  • Page 234

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 210 class of service 04 notification for incoming call list existence determine whether or not an extension displays check list when an incoming call is missed by a user. 0 = off 1 = on 0 0 20-09-02 05 signal/voice call turn off or on an extension user a...

  • Page 235

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c class of service 2 - 211 05 directed call pickup for own group turn off or on directed call pickup for calls ringing an extension pickup group (service code 756). 0 = off 1 = on 1 1 06 meet-me conference and paging turn off or on an extension user ability to...

  • Page 236

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 212 class of service 05 call forwarding with follow me turn off or on an extension user ability to initiate call forwarding with follow me. 0 = off 1 = on 1 1 06 unscreened transfer (ring inward transfer) turn off or on an extension user ability to use u...

  • Page 237

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c class of service 2 - 213 17 department group trunk-to-trunk transfer (each telephone group transfer) turn off or on an extension user ability to set trunk-to-trunk forwarding for a department group. 0 = off 1 = on 1 1 18 no recall allow/deny answered transfe...

  • Page 238

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 214 class of service table 2-11 class of service options (charging cost service), program 20-12 item no. Item input data default cos 01~14 cos 15 01 --- not used --- 02 advice of charge enable/disable a disa or tie trunk caller ability to dial 9 for trun...

  • Page 239

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c class of service 2 - 215 table 2-12 class of service options (supplementary service), program 20-13 item no. Item input data default cos 01~14 cos 15 01 long conversation alarm turn off or on the warning tone for long conversation (not for single line teleph...

  • Page 240

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 216 class of service 13 continued dialing (dtmf) signal on icm calls turn off or on an extension user ability to use continued dialing which allows dtmf signal sending while talking on extension. 0 = off 1 = on 1 1 14 department calling (plt no called ex...

  • Page 241

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c class of service 2 - 217 24 privacy release by pressing line key turn off or on an extension user ability to press a line key to barge into an outside call. The barge-in feature must be enabled if this option is used. 0 = off 1 = on 0 0 26 group listen turn ...

  • Page 242

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 218 class of service 38 headset ringing turn off or on an extension user ability to use the headset ringing. 0 = off 1 = on 0 0 39 acd queue status display turn off or on the acd queue status display for an extension class of service. Any extension user ...

  • Page 243

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c class of service 2 - 219 table 2-13 class of service options for disa/e&m service, program 20-14 item no. Item input data default cos 01~14 cos 15 01 first digit absorption (delete first digit dialed) for tie lines, enable/disable the ability to absorb (igno...

  • Page 244

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 220 class of service operation to change an extension class of service (via service code 677): 1. Press speaker. 2. Dial 677. 3. Dial the extension number you want to change. You see: mode1:nn press hold to leave the current value unchanged. The extensio...

  • Page 245

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c class of service 2 - 221 10. Enter the midnight 2 mode class of service for the extension you selected in step 3 and press hold. You see: mode8:nn press hold to leave the current value unchanged. 11. Enter the rest 2 mode class of service for the extension y...

  • Page 246

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 222 class of service this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 247: Clock/calendar Display

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c clock/calendar display 2 - 223 clock/calendar display description the system uses clock/calendar display for: using the daylight savings setup program, you can determine whether the system should automatically adjust the system time for daylight savings time...

  • Page 248

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 224 clock/calendar display changing the system time automatically changes the ipk ii in-mail time. The default settings in program 10-24 are updated in versions 1600 and 2100 to support the new daylight savings requirement. Default setting enabled system...

  • Page 249

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c clock/calendar display 2 - 225 10-01-03 time and date – day enter two digits (01~31) for the day. 10-01-04 time and date – week enter the digit (1 = sunday, 7 = saturday) to indicate the day of the week. 10-01-05 time and date – hour enter two digits (00~23)...

  • Page 250

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 226 clock/calendar display 20-02-07 system options for multiline telephones – time and date display mode select the display mode (type 1~8) for time and date (i.E., time and date format). 20-06-01 class of service for extensions assign a class of service...

  • Page 251

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c co message waiting indication 2 - 227 co message waiting indication description this feature provides a message waiting indication when voice mail from the central office is used. The co provides this feature using visual message waiting indication (vmwi) st...

  • Page 252

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 228 co message waiting indication default setting none system availability terminals all multiline terminals required component(s) coib(4)/(8)-u30 etu related features battery backup – system power digital voice mail message waiting speed dial – system/g...

  • Page 253

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c co message waiting indication 2 - 229 20-07-23 class of service option (administrator level) – co message waiting indication callback number programming waiting indication call back number programming: 0 = off (default), 1 = on. Allow the following operation...

  • Page 254

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 230 co message waiting indication 5. Press feature. This operation updates data in prg 13-04-01, a user can also edit the dial digits in prg 13-04-01 from handset-programming or pcpro/webpro. To retrieve a central office – message waiting indication: 1. ...

  • Page 255: Code Restriction

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c code restriction 2 - 231 code restriction description code restriction limits the numbers an extension user may dial. By allowing extensions to place only certain types of calls, you can better control long distance costs. The system applies code restriction...

  • Page 256

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 232 code restriction restrict code table when you want code restriction to allow most calls and restrict only selected calls, use the restrict code table. To block only 1-900 calls, for example, enter 1900 in the restrict code table. (if the same code re...

  • Page 257

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c code restriction 2 - 233 code call digit counting with code call digit counting, you can limit the number of digits long distance callers can dial. This lets you prevent callers from dialing extensively into long distance dial-up services. You can make four ...

  • Page 258

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 234 code restriction a phone and a trunk have a restriction class. The higher class applies for outgoing calls. For example: when trunk class is 01 and station class 02, toll restriction class 02 is applied. When trunk class is 15 and station class 03, t...

  • Page 259

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c code restriction 2 - 235 15-02-30 multiline telephone basic data setup – toll restriction class 20-06-01 class of service for extensions for each extension, assign a class of service (1~15). 20-08-02 class of service options (outgoing call service) – trunk o...

  • Page 260

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 236 code restriction 21-05-04 toll restriction class – maximum number of digits table assignment for the class you select, enable (1)/disable (0) the dialing limit for calls. When enabling, select from entries 1~4 in program 21-06-03. 21-05-05 toll restr...

  • Page 261

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c code restriction 2 - 237 21-06-06 toll restriction table data setup – permit code table program codes in the permit code tables. 21-06-07 toll restriction table data setup – deny restriction table program codes into the restrict code tables (200 codes per ta...

  • Page 262

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 238 code restriction this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 263: Code Restriction, Dial Block

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c code restriction, dial block 2 - 239 code restriction, dial block description code restriction-dial block lets a user temporarily block an extension code restriction. This helps a user block his or her phone from being used by another person while they are a...

  • Page 264

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 240 code restriction, dial block required component(s) none related features none programming 11-10-17 service code setup (for system administration) – dial block by supervisor assign a service code (601 by default) used by the supervisor to set dial blo...

  • Page 265

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c code restriction, dial block 2 - 241 operation to set dial block: 1. At the multiline terminal, press speaker. - or - at the single line telephone, lift the handset. 2. Dial 600 (default). 3. Dial the 4-digit dial block code (user defined). 4. Dial 1. Confir...

  • Page 266

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 242 code restriction, dial block to release dial block from another extension: 1. At the multiline terminal, press speaker. - or - at the single line telephone, lift the handset. 2. Dial 601. 3. Dial the 4-digit dial block code. 4. Dial the extension num...

  • Page 267: Code Restriction Override

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c code restriction override 2 - 243 code restriction override description code restriction override lets a user temporarily bypass the code restriction for an extension. This helps a user that must place an important call that code restriction normally prevent...

  • Page 268

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 244 code restriction override related features central office calls, placing code restriction station message detail recording voice response system (vrs).

  • Page 269

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c code restriction override 2 - 245 programming walking code restriction start should the walking toll restriction service code be changed from the default setting of 663? In program 21-14-01, assign a table with the 6-digit user id dialed to override the toll...

  • Page 270

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 246 code restriction override temporary code restriction override start should a user be able to temporarily override toll restriction programming? In program 20-06-01, assign class of service to extensions. Program 20-08-06, enter 1. Yes in program 21-0...

  • Page 271

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c code restriction override 2 - 247 programming 11-11-34 service code setup (for setup/entry operation) – temporary toll restriction override if required, change the service code (775) for temporary toll restriction override. 11-11-36 service code setup (for s...

  • Page 272

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 248 code restriction override if you wait too long before going to the next step, you may have to repeat the procedure. After dialing the service code, the display indicates the override codes as they are being entered. As the last digit is entered, the ...

  • Page 273

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c computer telephony integration (cti) applications 2 - 249 computer telephony integration (cti) applications description computer telephony integration (cti) applications automate your office with tapi compatibility and external pc control. Cti puts your tele...

  • Page 274

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 250 computer telephony integration (cti) applications related features tapi compatibility see this feature for the details on tapi services provided by the system and the tapi driver. Programming refer to the electra elite ipk ii system hardware manual f...

  • Page 275: Conference

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c conference 2 - 251 conference description conference lets an extension user add additional inside and outside callers to their conversation. With conference, a user may set up a multiple-party telephone meeting without leaving the office. The cpuii provides ...

  • Page 276

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 252 conference an extension with barge-in can transfer a call into an existing conference. This allows, for example, an attendant to locate co-workers and then transfer them into an existing telephone meeting. There is no need for the attendant to locate...

  • Page 277

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c conference 2 - 253 while talking on a virtual extension, if the station has a call on hold, a conference call cannot be established. Conferences can range from two groups of 32 parties, or up to 21 groups of three parties or any combination between until the...

  • Page 278

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 254 conference 11-16-02 single digit service code setup – barge-in if required, define the single digit service code a user dials to barge-in to a conference call. 14-01-04 basic trunk data setup – transmit gain level for conference and transfer calls co...

  • Page 279

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c conference 2 - 255 - or - access outside call. - or - retrieve call from park orbit. To get the outside call, you can either press a line key or press the speaker key and dial 9, the trunk access code + the trunk number (default #9). You can optionally go ba...

  • Page 280

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 256 conference 2. Dial split service code (794). Repeat this procedure to alternate between the remaining parties in the conference. Press the conf softkey or press conf twice to set up the conference again. Single line telephone 1. Hookflash and dial 79...

  • Page 281

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c conference 2 - 257 single line telephone 1. Hookflash, and dial # 8. 2. Hang up. To barge-in to conference call: 1. Pick up the handset or press speaker, and dial the service code (default = 710). If the telephone does not have the proper cos, a warning tone...

  • Page 282

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 258 conference break up the conference but retain the trunk calls: 1. While on an active conference call, press hold. 2. Select the line or call appearance (cap) key of the caller you wish to talk to. Any intercom calls which are involved in the conferen...

  • Page 283

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c conference, voice call/privacy release 2 - 259 conference, voice call/privacy release description voice call conference lets extension users in the same work area join in a trunk conference. To initiate a voice call conference, an extension user just presses...

  • Page 284

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 260 conference, voice call/privacy release system availability terminals all multiline terminals required component(s) none related features caller id conference programmable function keys programming 14-01-19 basic trunk data setup – privacy mode toggle...

  • Page 285

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c conference, voice call/privacy release 2 - 261 20-13-17 class of service options (supplementary service) – barge-in tone/display (intrusion tone) enable (1)/disable (0) the tone the user hears when the voice call conference feature is used. People on the cal...

  • Page 286

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 262 conference, voice call/privacy release this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 287: Continued Dialing

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c continued dialing 2 - 263 continued dialing description continued dialing allows an extension user to dial a call, wait for the called party to answer and then dial additional digits. This helps users that need services like voice mail, automatic banking and...

  • Page 288

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 264 continued dialing system availability terminals all multiline terminals required component(s) none related features pulse to tone conversion programming 15-03-03 single line telephone basic data setup – terminal type enter 1 for this option to allow ...

  • Page 289

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c continued dialing 2 - 265 operation to use continued dialing: 1. Place an intercom or trunk call. 2. Continue dialing after the call connects. Toll restriction and class of service programming may limit continued dialing..

  • Page 290

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 266 continued dialing this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 291

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c cordless telephone connection 2 - 267 cordless telephone connection description using an ap(r)/ap(a)-r unit for a dth/dtr telephone, or an apr/apa-u unit for a dtu/dtp telephone, a cordless telephone (2500-type) can be connected to a multiline terminal the s...

  • Page 292

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 268 cordless telephone connection default setting none system availability terminals any dth/dtr terminal with an ap(a)-r or ap(r)-r unit except the dtr-2dt-1 tel any dtu/dtp terminal with an apa-u or apr-u unit except the dtp-2dt-1 tel required componen...

  • Page 293

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c cordless telephone connection 2 - 269 20-12 class of service options (charging cost service) refer to table 2-11 class of service options (charging cost service), program 20-12 on page 2-214 . 20-13 class of service options (supplementary service) refer to t...

  • Page 294

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 270 cordless telephone connection this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 295: Data Line Security

    Data line security 2 - 271 d data line security description data line security protects any station port from receiving audible tones (such as camp-on or override) and denies a station barge-in while busy to prevent disruption of data transmission when using a modem or facsimile machine. Conditions ...

  • Page 296

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 272 data line security programming 20-09-07 class of service options (incoming call service) – call queuing turn off or on an extension ability to have calls queued if a call rings the extension when it is busy. 0 = off 1 = on (default) 20-13-05 class of...

  • Page 297: Delayed Ringing

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c delayed ringing 2 - 273 delayed ringing description delayed ringing allows programmed secondary answering positions to ring on incoming calls after a programmed time. This feature applies to co/pbx lines, secondary incoming extensions, virtual extensions, an...

  • Page 298

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 274 delayed ringing virtual extensions programming 14-07-01 trunk access map setup set up the trunk access maps. This sets the access options for trunks. Ring group programming overrides access map programming. Trunk access maps: 1~200 15-06-01 trunk acc...

  • Page 299

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c delayed ringing 2 - 275 operation to answer delay ringing calls: 1. Go off-hook. - or - press answer. - or - press the flashing key. Either trunk key or car/sie/ve key. To program a car/sie/ve key on a phone: 1. Press speaker . 2. Dial 752. 3. Press the key ...

  • Page 300

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 276 delayed ringing 9. Dial the mode number in which the key delays ring. 1 = day 1 2 = night 1 3 = midnight 1 4 = rest 1 5 = day 2 6 = night 2 7 = midnight 2 8 = rest 2 10. Press speaker..

  • Page 301: Department Calling

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c department calling 2 - 277 department calling description with department calling, an extension user can call an idle extension in a programmed department group (64 department groups available) by dialing the group pilot number. For example, this lets a call...

  • Page 302

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 278 department calling delay: enable (1)/disable (0) this feature using a (59) key programmed in prg 15-07. It can be done also by using service codes assigned in program 11-11-28 (set) and program 11-11-29 (cancel). When this feature is activated, any d...

  • Page 303

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c department calling 2 - 279 if all members of the department group are busy, an incoming or transferred call to the group pilot number queues for an available member. Each group has a queue that can hold any number of waiting calls. If a display telephone is ...

  • Page 304

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 280 department calling default setting disabled priority routing figure 2-1 department calling priority call routing priority 1 priority 2 priority 3 priority 1 priority 2 priority 3 priority 1 priority 2 priority 3 call call call telephone on a call tel...

  • Page 305

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c department calling 2 - 281 circular routing figure 2-2 department calling circular routing call 1 call 2 call 3 call 4.

  • Page 306

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 282 department calling system availability terminals all terminals required component(s) vrs for messaging related features call arrival (car) keys call forwarding department step calling transfer voice mail message indication on line keys voice response...

  • Page 307

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c department calling 2 - 283 11-11-27 service code setup (for setup/entry operation) – destination of automatic transfer for each department group set the service code (default: 604) for setting the destination for immediate automatic transfer for icm and tran...

  • Page 308

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 284 department calling 16-01-07 department group basic data setup – call recall restriction for stg set if a transferred call to the pilot number should recall (0) or camp on (1) to the busy or idle department group. 16-01-09 department group basic data ...

  • Page 309

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c department calling 2 - 285 22-07-01 dil assignment for each trunk assigned service type 4 in prg 22-02-01 above, assign the dil destination as the department group pilot number (as assigned in program 11-07-01). Department: groups 1~64 24-02-05 system option...

  • Page 310

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 286 department calling 2. Dial 650 + 0. - or - press department calling log in key (prg 15-07-01 or sc 751: 46). The key goes out when you log back in. To change the department group overflow destination: 1. Press speaker. 2. Dial 604 + department group ...

  • Page 311: Department Step Calling

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c department step calling 2 - 287 department step calling description after calling a busy department calling group member, an extension user can have department step calling quickly call another member in the group. The caller does not have to hang up and pla...

  • Page 312

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 288 department step calling programming 11-12-07 service code setup (for service access) – step call if required, customize the step call service code used by an extension user (default: 708). 11-16-01 single digit service code setup – step call if requi...

  • Page 313: Dialing Number Preview

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c dialing number preview 2 - 289 dialing number preview description dialing number preview lets a display multiline terminal user dial and review a number before the system dials it. Dialing number preview helps the user avoid dialing errors. Conditions an ext...

  • Page 314

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 290 dialing number preview programming 20-06-01 class of service for extensions assign a class of service (1~15) to an extension. 20-08-05 class of service options (outgoing call service) – dial number preview (preset dial) turn off (0) or on (1) the abi...

  • Page 315: Dial Pad Confirmation Tone

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c dial pad confirmation tone 2 - 291 dial pad confirmation tone description for an extension with dial pad confirmation tone enabled, the user hears a beep each time they press a key. This is helpful for intercom calls and dial pulse trunk calls, since these c...

  • Page 316

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 292 dial pad confirmation tone programming 11-11-19 service code setup (for setup/entry operation) – key touch tone on/off if required, change the service code to enable/disable the key touch tone (default: 724). Operation to enable/disable dial pad conf...

  • Page 317: Dial Tone Detection

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c dial tone detection 2 - 293 dial tone detection description if a trunk has dial tone detection enabled, the system monitors for dial tone from the telco or pbx when a user places a call on that trunk. If the user accesses the trunk directly (by pressing a li...

  • Page 318

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 294 dial tone detection last number redial save number dialed speed dial – system/group/station t1 trunking (with ani/dnis compatibility) trunk group routing trunk groups programming 10-09-01 dtmf and dial tone circuit setup if dial tone detection is ena...

  • Page 319

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c dial tone detection 2 - 295 21-01-05 system options for outgoing calls – dial tone detection time if dial tone detection is enabled, the system waits this time for the telco to return dial tone. When this time expires, the system assumes dial tone is not pre...

  • Page 320

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 296 dial tone detection this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 321: Digital Trunk Clocking

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c digital trunk clocking 2 - 297 digital trunk clocking description the ipk ii cpuii has a built-in clock source for all digital trunk cards. Digital trunk cards are connected via an internal plo (phase locked oscillator) to derive primary clock from the netwo...

  • Page 322

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 298 digital trunk clocking default setting none system availability terminals n/a required component(s) cpuii( )-u10 etu brt(4)-u( ) etu - or - dti-u40 etu with firmware v5.00 or higher related features isdn compatibility k-ccis – t1 t1 trunking (with an...

  • Page 323

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c digital trunk clocking 2 - 299 digital trunk clocking examples: if multiple pris exist, the first one that synchronized with the carrier is chosen. In this example, the pri in s1 was the first to synchronize with the carrier; therefore, it is the plo synchro...

  • Page 324

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 300 digital trunk clocking in this example, the pri in s4 was the first to synchronize with the carrier and became the plo synchronization source. The pri in s4 then went down and the system began looking forward in slot numbers to find the next plo sour...

  • Page 325

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c digital trunk clocking 2 - 301 in this example, there are multiple t1 circuits and a bri circuit. Since the t1 assigned as external has higher priority than a bri, the t1 external is the plo synchronization source. In this example, there is a pri, multiple t...

  • Page 326

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 302 digital trunk clocking if multiple bris exist and no pri or t-1 external exists, the system chooses the first bri that synchronized with the carrier. In this example, the bri in s4 synchronized with the carrier first and became the plo synchronizatio...

  • Page 327

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c digital trunk clocking 2 - 303 programming refer to the related features for programming. Operation refer to the related features for details..

  • Page 328

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 304 digital trunk clocking this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 329: Digital Voice Mail

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c digital voice mail 2 - 305 digital voice mail description the system is fully compatible with nec digital voice mail systems. These systems provide telephone users with comprehensive voice mail and automated attendant features. Voice mail ends the frustratio...

  • Page 330

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 306 digital voice mail live record while on a call, an extension user can have voice mail record the conversation. The multiline terminal user just presses the voice mail record key; the single line telephone user dials a code. Once recorded, the voice m...

  • Page 331

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c digital voice mail 2 - 307 message key operates as voice mail key the system enhances a telephone message key function when connected to a system which has voice mail installed. When an extension receives a voice mail, the message key can be used to check th...

  • Page 332

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 308 digital voice mail conversation record does not work for monitored calls. Caller id information is passed from voice mail to an extension for pre-answer display on an unscreened transfer from voice mail. Off-premise notification and external extensio...

  • Page 333

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c digital voice mail 2 - 309 system availability terminals all terminals required component(s) vms(2)/(4)/(8)-u( ) etu fms(2)/(4)/(8)-u( ) etu vmp(2)/(4)/(8)-u( ) etu vmp lx(2)/(4)/(8)-u( ) etu ctp lx(4)/(8)/(12)/(16)-u( ) etu related features barge-in call fo...

  • Page 334

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 310 digital voice mail programming 10-09-01 dtmf and dial tone circuit setup assign at least one circuit for dtmf reception (type 0 or 1). Use the following as a guide when allocating dtmf receivers: in light traffic sites, allocate one dtmf receiver for...

  • Page 335

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c digital voice mail 2 - 311 15-02-38 multiline telephone basic data setup – voice mail message wait lamp cycle (version 1600 or higher required) 1 = cycle 1 2 = cycle 2 (default) 3 = cycle 3 4 = cycle 4 5 = cycle 5 6 = cycle 6 7 = cycle 7 15-03-01 single line...

  • Page 336

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 312 digital voice mail 20-11-01 through 20-11-05 20-11-12 class of service options (hold/transfer service) set these options to 0 for the voice mail cos. 20-13-01 class of service options (supplementary service) – long conversation alarm 20-13-05 class o...

  • Page 337

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c digital voice mail 2 - 313 assign trunks as automated attendant trunks – method 2 22-02-01 incoming call trunk setup assign service type 0 to each trunk you want to ring into voice mail as a normal line. 22-04-01 incoming extension ring group assignment assi...

  • Page 338

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 314 digital voice mail 45-01-18 voice mail integration options – trunk number mapping (version 2000 or higher required) set if the system sends 2 digit trunk numbers only or 2 and 3 digit trunk numbers to voice mail. Options 2 = trunks 01~99 3 = trunks 0...

  • Page 339

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c digital voice mail 2 - 315 80-03-01 through 80-03-08 dtmf tone receiver setup 80-04-01 through 80-04-09 call progress tone detector setup use these programs to set the criteria for dtmf dial, ringback and busy tones. Operation calling your mailbox to call yo...

  • Page 340

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 316 digital voice mail multiline terminal 1. Press the voice mail key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 77). - or - press vm msg softkey. - or - press speaker and dial the voice mail master number. After voice mail answers, dial your mail- box number. Your mailbox n...

  • Page 341

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c digital voice mail 2 - 317 if prg 15-02-26 = 1 (voice mail key): 1. Press the message key once. The voice mail is called. When there are new messages, the mw led on the telephone flashes red. With this option set, the msg key can be used as a voice mail key ...

  • Page 342

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 318 digital voice mail 2. Press the voice mail key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: code 77 + vm pilot). - or - press the message key. 3. Dial number of mailbox to receive the transfer. This can be your mailbox number or a co-worker’s mailbox number. - or - press d...

  • Page 343

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c digital voice mail 2 - 319 recording your call to record your active call in your mailbox: multiline terminal 1. Press the voice mail record key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: code 78) you hear two beeps and your record key flashes. The beeps periodically repeat to r...

  • Page 344

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 320 digital voice mail 2. (optional) lift the handset to take call. You connect to the caller. The system records the first part of the message in your mailbox. With voice mail set to manual live monitor: your telephone must be idle. After voice mail pro...

  • Page 345: Direct Inward Dialing (Did)

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward dialing (did) 2 - 321 direct inward dialing (did) description direct inward dialing (did) lets outside callers directly dial system extensions. Did saves time for callers who know the extension number they wish to reach. To place a did call, th...

  • Page 346

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 322 direct inward dialing (did) flexible did service compatibility with three-digit service, the telco sends three digits to the system for translation. Be sure to program your system for compatibility with the provided telco service. For example, if the...

  • Page 347

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward dialing (did) 2 - 323 did intercept did intercept automatically reroutes did calls under certain conditions. There are three did intercepts: vacant number intercept if a caller dials an extension that does not exist or misdials, vacant number i...

  • Page 348

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 324 direct inward dialing (did) for busy or no answer intercept calls, a third destination can be defined in program 22-12. If the first and third destinations are programmed but the second destination is not, the incoming call goes to the third destinat...

  • Page 349

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward dialing (did) 2 - 325 did call by time schedule did call by time schedule allows for 100 programmed did conversion table entries (prg 22-17-01) that can be routed based on time patterns. Each did conversion table has a maximum of eight programm...

  • Page 350

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 326 direct inward dialing (did) federal communications commission did requirements allowing this equipment to operate in a manner that does not provide proper answer supervision signaling is in violation of part 68 rules. This equipment returns answer su...

  • Page 351

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward dialing (did) 2 - 327 when ordering did service, provide the telco with the following information: conditions analog did requires installation of a did(4)-u10 etu (provides four did ports). Depending on programming, the system may assign both t...

  • Page 352

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 328 direct inward dialing (did) when using did call by time schedule and breaking out the time patterns, set the start time to 00:00 and end time to 00:00 for this feature to operate correctly. Refer to did call by time schedule on page 2-325 for more de...

  • Page 353

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward dialing (did) 2 - 329 10-09-01 dtmf and dial tone circuit setup if the system has dtmf did trunks, be sure to reserve at least one circuit for analog trunk dtmf reception (type 0 or 2). Each dtmf did trunk must have an available receiver. Use t...

  • Page 354

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 330 direct inward dialing (did) 22-10-01 did translation table setup assign the start and end range of did translation table entries (1~2000) to each did translation table (1~20). 22-11-01 did translation number conversion – received number for each did ...

  • Page 355

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward dialing (did) 2 - 331 22-11-09 did translation number conversion – music on hold source for each did translation table entry (1~2000), specify the source of music to be used for did trunks. 0 = ic/moh port (default) 1 = bgm port 2 = aci port 22...

  • Page 356

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 332 direct inward dialing (did) 25-02-01 vrs/disa vrs message for each trunk port and each night mode, select the message source (0 = no message, 1 = vrs, 2 = aci, 3 = s lt), assign the vrs message number used as the automated attendant message for each ...

  • Page 357

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward dialing (did) 2 - 333 25-06-02 vrs/disa one-digit code attendant setup – destination number set up single digit dialing for automated attendant callers. For each vrs message programmed to answer outside calls, specify: the digit the automated a...

  • Page 358

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 334 direct inward dialing (did) 25-07-11 system timers for vrs/disa – vrs/disa answer delay time set the time the system waits after receiving an incoming vrs/disa call before the system automatically answers the call (0~64800 seconds). 25-07-13 system t...

  • Page 359

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward dialing (did) 2 - 335 operation did calls ring extensions like normal trunk calls. To activate did call by time schedule: 1. At any display multiline terminal, press speaker. 2. Dial the dial-in mode switching service code (default = not assign...

  • Page 360

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 336 direct inward dialing (did) this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 361: Direct Inward Line (Dil)

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward line (dil) 2 - 337 direct inward line (dil) description a direct inward line (dil) is a trunk that rings an extension, virtual extension or department group directly. Since dils only ring one extension or group (i.E., the dil destination), empl...

  • Page 362

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 338 direct inward line (dil) a user can activate group call pickup to intercept a dil ringing another extension. Program a name for a dil in program 14-01-01. This makes it easier to identify the incoming call. If a multiline terminal is busy, a second i...

  • Page 363

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward line (dil) 2 - 339 group call pickup name storing off-hook signaling paging, external programmable function keys ring groups transfer programming 15-07-01 programmable function keys to have the dil ring a key, program a line key for the dil tru...

  • Page 364

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 340 direct inward line (dil) 22-07-01 dil assignment set the destination extension number for each dil – for each night service mode. The destination can be an extension port, virtual extension number, or department group pilot number (as assigned in prg...

  • Page 365

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward system access (disa) 2 - 341 direct inward system access (disa) description disa permits outside callers to directly dial system extensions, trunks and selected features. This could help an employee away from the office that wants to directly d...

  • Page 366

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 342 direct inward system access (disa) trunk group access disa callers may access a specific trunk group for outgoing calls through the system. To access a trunk group, the user dials service code 704 followed by the trunk group number (trunk groups 1~10...

  • Page 367

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward system access (disa) 2 - 343 disa operating modes the disa operating modes determine what happens when a disa caller forgets to dial, calls a busy or unanswered extension or dials incorrectly. The system can either drop the call or send it to a...

  • Page 368

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 344 direct inward system access (disa) 2. After 10 minutes (tandem trunking = program 24-02-07 or disa = program 25-07-07), a warning tone is heard and the user dials # (program 20-28-01) to extend the conversation. 3. After three minutes (program 20-28-...

  • Page 369

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward system access (disa) 2 - 345 system availability terminals remote analog dtmf (2500 type) telephones required component(s) dspii-u10 unit and vrs compact flash (for announcements) related features automatic route selection central office calls,...

  • Page 370

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 346 direct inward system access (disa) 11-09-02 trunk access code – 2nd trunk route access code assign the service code set up in prg 11-01 for alternate trunk route access. 14-01-02 basic trunk data setup – transmit level 14-01-03 basic trunk data setup...

  • Page 371

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward system access (disa) 2 - 347 22-01-11 system options for incoming calls – vrs waiting message interval time set up the duration time between announcing the vrs waiting message for auto – attendant & queuing. The message is repeatedly sent out d...

  • Page 372

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 348 direct inward system access (disa) 25-04-01 vrs/disa transfer ring group with no answer/busy set the operating mode of each disa trunk. This sets what happens to the call when the disa caller calls a busy or unanswered extension. The call can either ...

  • Page 373

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward system access (disa) 2 - 349 25-07-09 system timers for vrs/disa – disa internal paging time this is the maximum time for an internal page placed by a disa caller. If the page continues longer than this time (0~64800 seconds), the system termin...

  • Page 374

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 350 direct inward system access (disa) trunk continue/disconnect codes 14-01-25 basic trunk data setup – continued/discontinued trunk-to-trunk conversation when program 24-02-10 is set to disconnect a trunk after the defined time, determine whether or no...

  • Page 375

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct inward system access (disa) 2 - 351 operation to place a disa call into the system (from any 2500 type telephone): 1. Dial the telephone number that rings the disa trunk. 2. Wait for the disa trunk to automatically answer with a unique dial tone. 3. D...

  • Page 376

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 352 direct inward system access (disa) 6. Dial the number of the extension to be forwarded. 7. Dial 1 to set call forwarding or 0 to cancel call forwarding. 8. Dial the extension number where the calls are forwarded. To use the continue code to extend a ...

  • Page 377

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct station selection (dss) console 2 - 353 direct station selection (dss) console enhancements in version 1500 or higher, dss/one-touch keys can be used to one-touch transfer without using transfer. In version 1600 or higher, when a ring group call rings...

  • Page 378

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 354 direct station selection (dss) console description the dss console gives a multiline terminal user a busy lamp field (blf) and one-button access to extensions, trunks, and system features. This saves time for users that do a lot of call processing (e...

  • Page 379

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct station selection (dss) console 2 - 355 when installing a dss, the system must auto-detect the console for the leds to function correctly. When connecting the dss to an extension previously defined with another circuit type, undefine the circuit type ...

  • Page 380

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 356 direct station selection (dss) console when a multiline terminal user is on a call, they can press a dss key for that station to transfer to another station. It is not necessary to press transfer to transfer to another station using a dss key. When a...

  • Page 381

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct station selection (dss) console 2 - 357 central office calls, answering central office calls, placing door box night service one-touch calling paging, external paging, internal programmable function keys speed dial – system/group/station programming 1...

  • Page 382

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 358 direct station selection (dss) console 30-02-01 dss console extension assignment – extension number designate the dss console installations (i.E., the extensions that have dss consoles connected to them). 30-03-01 dss console key assignment customize...

  • Page 383

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c direct station selection (dss) console 2 - 359 4. (optional) announce the call. If called party does not want the call, press the flashing line key to retrieve it. Making an external page using your dss console: 1. Press the dss console external page zone ke...

  • Page 384

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 360 direct station selection (dss) console using a dss console key as a one-touch or programmable function key: a user can have dss console keys programmed as one-touch keys. These keys can be used for direct station selection, trunk calling, personal sp...

  • Page 385: Directed Call Pickup

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c directed call pickup 2 - 361 directed call pickup description directed call pickup permits an extension user to intercept a call ringing another extension. This allows a user to conveniently answer a call for a co-worker from their own telephone. With direct...

  • Page 386

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 362 directed call pickup related features call arrival (car) keys department calling group call pickup hold hotline park secretary call pickup secondary incoming extension transfer virtual extensions voice mail message indication on line keys programming...

  • Page 387

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c directed call pickup 2 - 363 20-10-05 class of service options (answer service) – directed call pickup for own group enable (1)/disable (0) an extension user ability to use directed call pickup for calls ringing their own group. Operation to use directed cal...

  • Page 388

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 364 directed call pickup this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 389: Directory Dialing

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c directory dialing 2 - 365 directory dialing description directory dialing allows a multiline terminal user to select a co-worker or outside caller from a list of names, rather than dialing the telephone number. There are four types of directory dialing: sys ...

  • Page 390

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 366 directory dialing system availability terminals all display multiline terminals with softkeys required component(s) none related features last number redial name storing speed dial – system/group/station softkeys programming 20-13-51 class of service...

  • Page 391

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c directory dialing 2 - 367 2. Press the softkey for the directory dialing type: sys company (common) system speed dials spdg department (group) speed dials sta personal speed dials ext co-worker’s extensions directory dialing follows any feature restr...

  • Page 392

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 368 directory dialing this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 393

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c distinctive ringing, tones and flash patterns 2 - 369 distinctive ringing, tones and flash patterns description distinctive ringing, tones and flash patterns provide extension users with audible and visual call status signals. This lets users tell the types ...

  • Page 394

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 370 distinctive ringing, tones and flash patterns dtu/dtp style telephones only follow high, mid range and low ring tone settings. They do not follow melodies. If prg 22-03-01 is set to 0~3 and prg 15-02-02 is set to 1~3, trunk calls follow the ring patt...

  • Page 395

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c distinctive ringing, tones and flash patterns 2 - 371 related features call arrival (car) keys single line telephones, analog 500/2500 sets programming 15-02-02 multiline telephone basic data setup – trunk ring tone from the range specified in program 22-03-...

  • Page 396

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 372 distinctive ringing, tones and flash patterns 15-02-38 multiline telephone basic data setup – voice mail message wait lamp cycle (version 1600 or higher required) 1 = cycle 1 2 = cycle 2 (default) 3 = cycle 3 4 = cycle 4 5 = cycle 5 6 = cycle 6 7 = c...

  • Page 397

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c distinctive ringing, tones and flash patterns 2 - 373 operation to listen to the incoming ring choices: 1. Press speaker. 2. Dial 711. 8 0 - no tone 0ms tone 14 unit basic tone duration gain level 1 10 ~ 440/480hz -13/-13db 1000ms 32 2 0 - no tone 2100ms 32 ...

  • Page 398

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 374 distinctive ringing, tones and flash patterns 3. Dial 1 to check ringing for intercom calls. - or - dial 2 to check ringing for trunk calls. 4. For intercom calls, select the pitch you want to check (1~8). - or - for trunk calls, select the pitch (1~...

  • Page 399: Do Not Disturb

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c do not disturb 2 - 375 do not disturb description do not disturb blocks incoming calls and paging announcements. Dnd permits an extension user to work by the telephone undisturbed by incoming calls and announcements. The user can activate dnd while their tel...

  • Page 400

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 376 do not disturb when dnd and call forward are set on the same telephone, call forwarding works. If busy and no answer forwarding are set to different locations, it follows the busy forwarding. (version 1500 or higher required.) if an extension already...

  • Page 401

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c do not disturb 2 - 377 related features call forwarding call forwarding/do not disturb override central office calls, answering direct inward line (dil) distinctive ringing, tones and flash patterns selectable display messaging programming 11-11-08 service c...

  • Page 402

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 378 do not disturb operation to activate or deactivate do not disturb while your extension is idle: multiline terminal 1. Do not lift the handset. 2. Press the dnd key. - or - press speaker, and dial 747. 3. Dial the dnd option code. 0 = cancel dnd 1 = i...

  • Page 403: Door Box

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c door box 2 - 379 door box description the door box is a self-contained intercom unit typically used to monitor an entrance door. A visitor at the door can press the door box call button (like a door bell). The door box then sends chime tones to all extension...

  • Page 404

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 380 door box each channel in the pgd(2)-u10 adp has a jumper which must be set for door box operation. Refer to the electra elite ipk ii system hardware manual for additional details. The pgd(2)-u10 adp can be connected only to an esib(8)-u20 etu. If the...

  • Page 405

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c door box 2 - 381 10-05-01 general purpose relay setup define which relay circuits (5~8) on a pgd(2)-u10 adp adapter are used for general purpose relay. 11-12-36 service code access (for service access) – door box access if the service code for doorphone acce...

  • Page 406

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 382 door box operation to call a door box: multiline terminal 1. Press speaker. 2. Dial 702. 3. Dial door box number (1~8). Single line telephone 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial 702. 3. Dial door box number (1~8). To activate the door box strike: multiline ...

  • Page 407

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c door box 2 - 383 single line telephone if you are busy on a call, an off-hook signal is heard indicating the incoming door box call. 1. Press the flash key or hookflash to place your active call on hold. 2. Dial the door box access code (702 by default) plus...

  • Page 408

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 384 door box this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 409: Drop Key

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c drop key 2 - 385 drop key description the drop key abandons a call while retaining the pbx/centrex line to originate another call. The drop key is provided by programming a programmable function key. This feature allows the recall key to be used to provide a...

  • Page 410

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 386 drop key programming 11-12-42 service code setup (for service access) – flash on trunk lines default is #3. 11-12-59 service code setup (for service access) – trunk drop operation for slt default is not assigned. 14-02-03 analog trunk data setup – fl...

  • Page 411

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c drop key 2 - 387 2. Receive the new co/pbx dial tone. 3. Dial the desired number. To use the feature key plus recall key from a multiline terminal with a co/pbx call in progress: 1. Press feature. 2. Press recall. Receive the new co/pbx dial tone. 3. Dial th...

  • Page 412

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 388 drop key this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 413: Term

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c d term cordless ii terminal 2 - 389 d term cordless ii terminal description the nec d term cordless ii terminal may be used with the electra elite ipk ii kts. The dtr-4r-1 tel uses 900 mhz digital spread spectrum (dss) technology and must be connected in tan...

  • Page 414

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 390 d term cordless ii terminal synchronous ringing does not apply to the cordless terminals. A beep indicates when the cordless terminal receives off-hook ringing. Depending on your environment, the maximum number of cordless devices used without interf...

  • Page 415

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c d term cordless ii terminal 2 - 391 operation to program the d term cordless ii: 1. Press and hold down and # , then press talk. The f1 led flashes red. 2. Press r/vol repeatedly to scroll through the line key (lk) and feature options for function key f1. 3....

  • Page 416

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 392 d term cordless ii terminal to answer an incoming ringing call: 1. When the handset is in the charger, lift it. icon is displayed. 2. When the handset is out of the base unit, press talk if ringing line preference is assigned. Icon is displayed. 3....

  • Page 417

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c d term cordless ii terminal 2 - 393 to adjust ring volume: while the telephone is not being used, press r/vol (upper key on left side) repeatedly to select desired setting display: ring type a high ring type a low ring type b high ring type b low ring type c...

  • Page 418

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 394 d term cordless ii terminal 3. Press desk to select multiline terminal. Switching must be accomplished while both terminals are idle. A call in progress cannot be switched. When tried, it is dropped. Switching held calls is not recommended because le...

  • Page 419

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c d term cordless ii terminal 2 - 395 13. To restore the normal redial function, enter setup mode, and press f3 and hold to display digital (redial). 14. Press talk to restore standby mode..

  • Page 420

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 396 d term cordless ii terminal this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 421: Term

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c d term cordless lite ii terminal 2 - 397 d term cordless lite ii terminal description the nec d term cordless ii lite terminal may be used with the electra elite ipk ii kts. The dth-4r-1 tel uses 900 mhz fm with adpcm (digital) technology and is connected in...

  • Page 422

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 398 d term cordless lite ii terminal synchronous ringing does not apply to the cordless terminals. A beep indicates when the cordless terminal receives off-hook ringing. A spare battery is available as an optional available part. A second battery is not ...

  • Page 423

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c d term cordless lite ii terminal 2 - 399 programming 10-03-01 etu setup terminal type (b1) for esi 15-07 programmable function keys 20-07 class of service options (administrator level) refer to table 2-6 class of service options (administrator level), progra...

  • Page 424

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 400 d term cordless lite ii terminal 3. Press on/offmute to select the displayed line key or feature. 4. When a line key is assigned, press mute once to enter the off-hook ringing on or off mode. Press ring/vol to toggle between talk for on or no talk fo...

  • Page 425: Term

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c d term handset cordless 2 - 401 d term handset cordless description the d term handset cordless terminal is a stand-alone telephone with a direct connection to one digital port on the esi(8)-u( ) etu. The d term handset cordless terminal has the following fe...

  • Page 426

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 402 d term handset cordless when a communication path is established between the handset cordless terminal and the base unit, the talk/batt.Low led is on and dial tone is generated. When a communication path cannot be established in five seconds, an erro...

  • Page 427

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c d term handset cordless 2 - 403 radio interference causes interruptions in conversation. When this happens, your unit is not defective. When noise continues, move to a different location while you talk. (you might even need to move the base unit.) when the s...

  • Page 428

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 404 d term handset cordless to change the auto talk mode: 1. Hold down trf key while changing the ringer on/off switch from off to on. 2. When the mode changes, a confirmation tone is generated: auto talk off: 3 beeps auto talk on: 2 beeps answering call...

  • Page 429

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c d term handset cordless 2 - 405 to adjust receiver volume with a call in progress: press the vol key repeatedly to adjust from medium  high  low  normal in this order. When call is disconnected, default volume returns to normal. To mute handset to disable...

  • Page 430

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 406 d term handset cordless to hold a call in progress at the handset: 1. Press trf. 2. An internal dial tone is generated. 3. To return to the held party press the flashing green line key or conference key. After a programmed time the held call recalls ...

  • Page 431: Term

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c d term ip gateway system 2 - 407 d term ip gateway system description the d term ip gateway system converts traditional voice traffic and its accompanying signaling for call setup and networking to ip for transport across a managed ip network. The system all...

  • Page 432

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 408 d term ip gateway system s oftware s upport tcp/ip protocol supports ip traffic and management. Rvpoip uses udp/ip protocol for voice transmission. Serial rvp uses hdlc encapsulation for voice transmission. Management and utilities include telnet, in...

  • Page 433

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c d term ip gateway system 2 - 409 the gateway power supply and cables should be installed away from high power/high rf noise devices such as computers, fans, fluorescent ballast, or power supplies. Good wiring practices are required. Do not run wires across d...

  • Page 434

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 410 d term ip gateway system application guide pc for configuration t1, fractional t1, isdn, frame relay or atm circuit that can connect the branch unit to the gateway location. A networking terminating device that can interface with the gateway and bran...

  • Page 435: E911 Compatibility

    E911 compatibility 2 - 411 e e911 compatibility description e911 compatibility ensures that emergency calls always get through. If an emergency occurs, a user simply goes to any telephone, lifts the handset and dials 911. The system built-in e911 compatibility places the emergency call even if the u...

  • Page 436

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 412 e911 compatibility emergency routing when an extension user dials 911, the system can automatically find a trunk for the call. The system can choose a route to which the user normally does not have access. If all normal routes are busy, the system ca...

  • Page 437

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c e911 compatibility 2 - 413 conditions if program 21-01-10 is set to an entry other than 0, a call does not have a talk path unless the user dials at least the number of digits entered in this option when placing an outgoing call. An entry of 4 digits or high...

  • Page 438

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 414 e911 compatibility 21-02-01 trunk group routing for extensions assign the routes set in program 14-06 to extensions. This program and program 14-06 are the minimum required if e911 must seize a line to dial. Trunk groups: 1~100 system availability te...

  • Page 439

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c e911 compatibility 2 - 415 3. Dial a trunk access code (e.G., 9) or press a line key. 4. Dial 911. To turn off the e911 alarm at your telephone: 1. Lift the handset or press speaker. 2. Dial 786. The alarm goes off. - or - (if you have a display telephone) 1...

  • Page 440

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 416 e911 compatibility this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 441: Electra Elite Ipk Terminals

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c electra elite ipk terminals 2 - 417 electra elite ipk terminals description the electra elite ipk terminals provide ergonomic form and user-friendly functions. With advanced digital circuitry, the ipk terminals consists of distinct models to meet diverse use...

  • Page 442

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 418 electra elite ipk terminals lcd contrast only english displays are provided (speaker, handset, ring, lcd). Mic controls the built-in microphone during speakerphone mode and controls the handset mute feature during handset/headset operation. The dir k...

  • Page 443

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c electra elite ipk terminals 2 - 419 with non-ip electra elite ipk ii terminals, up to two adapters can be installed in a telephone. For compatibility of multiple adapter units, refer to the following table: an ac-2r unit/ac-3r unit (ac adapter) is required w...

  • Page 444

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 420 electra elite ipk terminals system availability terminals dth-16ld-1 tel dth-32d-1 tel dth-16d-1 tel dth-8d-1 tel dth-8-1 tel dcr-60-1 console ip terminals ith-16d-2 tel ith-8d-2 tel required component(s) esi(8)-u( ) etu esib(8)-u( ) etu esie(8)-u( )...

  • Page 445

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c electra elite ipk terminals 2 - 421 wm-r unit (wall mount unit) ac-2r unit (ac adapter) ac-3r unit (ac adapter, pc type) ip units ad(a)-2r unit (adapter for call recording) ilpa-r (in line power adapter) related features ancillary device connection electra e...

  • Page 446

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 422 electra elite ipk terminals 20-10 class of service options (answer service) refer to table 2-9 class of service options (answer service), program 20-10 on page 2-210 . 20-11 class of service options (hold/transfer service) refer to table 2-10 class o...

  • Page 447

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c electra elite ipk terminals 2 - 423 lcd contrast control yes yes yes yes no yes yes housing color white or black white or black white or black white or black white or black white or black white or black softkeys yes yes yes yes no yes yes a maximum of 32 key...

  • Page 448

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 424 electra elite ipk terminals this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 449

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c electra elite terminal migration 2 - 425 electra elite terminal migration description electra elite terminal migration allows an electra elite customer to protect their investment in terminals when purchasing electra elite ipk ii systems. Electra elite multi...

  • Page 450

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 426 electra elite terminal migration related features ancillary device connection electra elite ipk terminals handsfree and monitor off-hook signaling softkeys programming 10-03-01 etu setup terminal type (b1) for esi 15-07 programmable function keys 20-...

  • Page 451

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c electra elite terminal migration 2 - 427 20-14 class of service options for disa/e&m refer to table 2-13 class of service options for disa/e&m service, program 20-14 on page 2-219 . Operation refer to individual features for details..

  • Page 452

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 428 electra elite terminal migration this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 453

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c eliteapps – interactive voice response 2 - 429 eliteapps – interactive voice response description eliteapps – interactive voice response (ivr) is a software application that accepts a combination of voice telephone input, database information, and telephone ...

  • Page 454

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 430 eliteapps – interactive voice response access caller id information. Set all call control parameters. Supervise normal and blind transfers. Announce a call prior to connection to another port. Multilingual support. Database access (odbc) open a data ...

  • Page 455

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c eliteapps – interactive voice response 2 - 431 cancel a timer. Variables variables are user definable. Variables can be integer or string type. Set a variable to the result of an expression. Set a variable to a string. Set a variable to another variable. Set...

  • Page 456

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 432 eliteapps – interactive voice response required component(s) ivr(8)-u( ) etu related features digital voice mail ipk ii in-mail voice mail integration (analog) programming 11-02-01 extension numbering 11-07-01 department group pilot numbers – dial 15...

  • Page 457: Elite Callanalyst

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c elite callanalyst 2 - 433 elite callanalyst description elite callanalyst is an easy to use, graphically oriented software package that allows you to monitor and analyze telephone calls, understand telephone usage, and cut costs. Incoming and outgoing calls ...

  • Page 458

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 434 elite callanalyst changes can now be made to the call record such as account code entry, dnis, and comments field. Call costing and user configurable rate plans time billing included reports: date and time summaries most frequently called numbers dep...

  • Page 459

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c elite callanalyst 2 - 435 the smdr call buffer stores 500 calls. The buffer stores calls when the smdr device is unavailable. When the buffer fills, the oldest record is deleted to allow the new record to be saved. The ipk ii smdr does not provide data to su...

  • Page 460

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 436 elite callanalyst printer for reports the elite callanalyst software should be installed on a separate pc, but other applications may be installed. Performance depends on the need for memory and processing for the other applications. Related features...

  • Page 461

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c elite callanalyst 2 - 437 for example, if trunk port 049 has a trunk name of pri ch1, if program 35-02-03 = 0 (name) and prg 35-02-14 = 1 (display date), then smdr shows 8/19 049. However, if program 35-02-14 = 0 (date not displayed), the smdr shows pri ch1....

  • Page 462

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 438 elite callanalyst 35-01-06 smdr options – minimum call duration a call must last at least this time (0~65535 seconds) to be included in the smdr report. Default is 0 (all). 35-01-07 smdr options – minimum ring time (for incoming calls) a call must ri...

  • Page 463

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c elite callanalyst 2 - 439 35-02-12 smdr output options – did table name output determine if the did table name should be displayed for incoming did calls. Did table name display: 0 = not displayed (default) 1 = displayed 35-02-13 smdr output options – cli ou...

  • Page 464

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 440 elite callanalyst 35-03-01 smdr port assignment for trunk group assign the smdr port for each trunk group. This is the smdr port where the incoming call information should be sent. Trunk group: 1~100 (default is 1) smdr port: 1~8 35-04-01 smdr port a...

  • Page 465

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c elite callanalyst 2 - 441 operation refer to central office calls, answering on page 2-187 and central office calls, placing on page 2-195 features for detailed operations for placing or answering calls..

  • Page 466

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 442 elite callanalyst this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 467

    Facsimile co branch connection 2 - 443 f facsimile co branch connection description the electra elite ipk ii system provides branch connection of locally provided facsimile machines to co/pbx lines. Additional dedicated co/pbx lines are not required for a facsimile to operate. The facsimile shares t...

  • Page 468

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 444 facsimile co branch connection required component(s) coi(4)-u( ) etu or coib(4)-u( ) etu related features none programming 14-02-14 analog trunk data setup – loop start/ground start 0 = loop start 1 = ground start 14-05-01 trunk group trunk ports = 1...

  • Page 469: Flash

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c flash 2 - 445 flash description flash allows an extension user to access certain co and pbx features by interrupting the trunk loop current. Flash lets an extension user take full advantage of whatever features the connected telco or pbx offers. You must set...

  • Page 470

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 446 flash programming 11-12-42 service code setup (for service access) – flash on trunk lines assign service code, default = #3. 14-02-03 analog trunk data setup – flash type always set this to 0 for open loop flash. 14-02-04 analog trunk data setup – ho...

  • Page 471: Flexible System Numbering

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c flexible system numbering 2 - 447 flexible system numbering description flexible system numbering lets you reassign the system port-to-extension assignments. This allows an employee to retain their extension number if they move to a different office. Also, f...

  • Page 472

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 448 flexible system numbering conditions programming follows a telephone extension number, not the port number in most cases. If you relocate a telephone, you may need to change additional programming. If the extension numbering plan is changed from 3xx ...

  • Page 473

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c flexible system numbering 2 - 449 any feature which requires dialing a code or extension number can be affected. When the system searches the dial extension analyze table (prg 11-20-01), it uses prefix searching, giving the lower table number the higher prio...

  • Page 474

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 450 flexible system numbering virtual extensions/car keys: ve port 1 = 201 ~ ve port 99 = 299 ve port 100 = 3301 ~ ve port 256 = 3457 system availability terminals all stations required component(s) none related features none programming 11-01-01 system ...

  • Page 475

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c flexible system numbering 2 - 451 11-12 service code setup (for service access) refer to table 2-22 service code setup (for service access), program 11-12 on page 2-455 . 11-13 service code setup (for acd) refer to table 2-23 service code setup (for acd), pr...

  • Page 476

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 452 flexible system numbering 20 vrs - record/erase message mlt 616 20-07-13 21 vrs - general message playback mlt 611 20-07-14 22 vrs - record or erase general message mlt 612 20-07-15 23 smdr - extension accumulated printout code mlt 621 20-07-18 24 sm...

  • Page 477

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c flexible system numbering 2 - 453 09 answer message waiting mlt, slt 0 11-10-16 10 cancel all messages waiting mlt, slt 773 11 cancel message waiting mlt, slt 771 12 alarm clock mlt, slt 727 20-01-06 13 display language selection for multiline terminal mlt 6...

  • Page 478

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 454 flexible system numbering 33 dial block mlt, slt 600 34 temporary toll restriction override mlt, slt 775 21-07 35 pilot group withdrawing mlt, slt 650 36 toll restriction override mlt, slt 663 21-14 37 ring volume set mlt 729 38 programmable function...

  • Page 479

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c flexible system numbering 2 - 455 58 call forward with personal greeting mlt, slt 713 table 2-22 service code setup (for service access), program 11-12 item no. Item terminals default related program 01 bypass call activating call forwarding/do not disturb o...

  • Page 480

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 456 flexible system numbering 23 meet-me answer in same paging group mlt, slt 763 24 combined paging mlt, slt 1 31-07 25 direct call pickup - own group mlt, slt 756 26 call pickup for specified group mlt, slt 768 27 call pickup mlt, slt # 28 call pickup ...

  • Page 481

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c flexible system numbering 2 - 457 51 vm access (in-mail and vms) mlt, slt 8 52 live monitoring (in-mail) mlt no setting 53 live recording at slt slt 654 54 vrs routing for ani/dnis use when setting up ani/dnis routing to the vrs automated attendant. Using th...

  • Page 482

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 458 flexible system numbering 11 acd agent logout by supervisor allows an acd supervisor to log out of a group. Mlt 668 12 change agent acd group by supervisor when using service code 669 to change an agent acd group, the supervisor must enter a 2-digit ...

  • Page 483

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c flexible system numbering 2 - 459 11-16-01 single digit service code setup – step call assign the single digit (post-dialing) service code. 11-16-02 one-digit service code setup – barge-in set up item 02 for single digit barge-in. For example, you can assign...

  • Page 484

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 460 flexible system numbering 11-16-06 single digit service code setup – dnd/call forward override bypass customize the 1-digit service code used for dnd/call forward override. 11-16-07 single digit service code setup – message waiting (default: 0). 11-1...

  • Page 485: Flexible Timeouts

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c flexible timeouts 2 - 461 flexible timeouts description the flexible timeouts feature provides a variety of timers in the resident system program to allow the system to operate without initial programming. The system timers can be changed to meet customer ne...

  • Page 486

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 462 flexible timeouts 22-01-04 20-31-08 dil no answer recall time a dil that rings its programmed destination longer than this time diverts to the dil no answer ring group (program 22-08-01). Trunk timer class is referred by the trunk. 22-01-06 20-31-09 ...

  • Page 487

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c flexible timeouts 2 - 463 conditions timer classes are used for car/ve also. When timer class is set to 0 it uses the system-wide timers. All stations and trunks are assigned to timer class 0 at default. Both system-wide timers (timer class 0) and timer clas...

  • Page 488

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 464 flexible timeouts required component(s) none related features none programming 20-29-01 timer class for extensions assign the timer class (0~15) to each extension for each night mode. This entry includes virtual extension number. 20-30-01 timer class...

  • Page 489: Forced Trunk Disconnect

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c forced trunk disconnect 2 - 465 forced trunk disconnect description forced trunk disconnect allows an extension user to disconnect (release) another extension active outside call. The user can then place a call on the released trunk. Forced trunk disconnect ...

  • Page 490

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 466 forced trunk disconnect related features central office calls, placing programming 11-10-26 service code setup (for system administrator) – forced trunk disconnect assign the service code. 20-06-01 class of service for extensions assign a class of se...

  • Page 491

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c forced trunk disconnect 2 - 467 single line telephone 1. Dial trunk access code ( # 9 + trunk number). You hear busy tone. Trunk numbers are 001~200. 2. Dial service code (not set at default). You hear confirmation beeps as the system disconnects the line. 3...

  • Page 492

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 468 forced trunk disconnect this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 493: Group Call Pickup

    Group call pickup 2 - 469 g group call pickup description group call pickup allows an extension user to answer a call ringing another extension in a pickup group. This permits co-workers in the same work area to easily answer each other’s calls. The user can intercept the ringing call by dialing a c...

  • Page 494

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 470 group call pickup system availability terminals any station required component(s) none related features central office calls, answering directed call pickup programmable function keys programming 11-12-25 service code setup (for service access) – dir...

  • Page 495

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c group call pickup 2 - 471 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign group call pickup keys: code 24 for an extension own pickup group and ring group calls (service code # ) code 25 for a telephone ringing in another pickup group (service code 769) (used whe...

  • Page 496

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 472 group call pickup to answer a call ringing a telephone in another pickup group when you do not know the group number: 1. Pick up the handset or press speaker. 2. At multiline terminal only, press the group call pickup key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 25). -...

  • Page 497: Group Listen

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c group listen 2 - 473 group listen description group listen permits a multiline terminal user to talk on the handset and have their caller’s voice broadcast over the telephone speaker. This lets the multiline terminal user’s co-workers listen to the conversat...

  • Page 498

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 474 group listen programming 20-06-01 class of service for extensions assign a class of service (1~15) to an extension. 20-13-26 class of service options (supplementary service) – group listen enable (1)/disable (0) an extension user ability to activate ...

  • Page 499: Handset Mute

    Handset mute 2 - 475 h handset mute description handset mute is provided to most terminals connected to the electra elite ipk system. While talking on the multiline terminal handset, a station user can dial a feature code or press mic to mute the transmit speech path. The station user can still hear...

  • Page 500

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 476 handset mute programming 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign a function key for handset transmission cut off (code 40). 80-01-01 service tone setup – service tone 25 (service set tone) allow the service set tone to be disabled. Refer to table ...

  • Page 501

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c handset mute 2 - 477 16 lock-out tone 0 basic 2 0 6 1 1 32 (0db) 32 (0db) 17 clock alarm tone 0 basic 4 6 0 6 0 1 1 1 7 32 (0db) 32 (0db) 32 (0db) 32 (0db) 18 bgm 0 basic 0 0 0 32 (0db) 19 door box chime 1 3 basic 6 4 4 2 2 2 0 2 2 3 4 6 5 38 (+3db) 26 (-3db...

  • Page 502

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 478 handset mute 27 talkback tone 2 basic 2 0 6 1 1 32 (0db) 32 (0db) 28 speaker monitor tone this tone is what the originator hears when placing a handsfree speaker icm call. 1 basic 2 0 6 1 1 32 (0db) 32 (0db) 29 door relay tone 1 basic 2 0 6 1 1 32 (0...

  • Page 503

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c handset mute 2 - 479 46 did error tone 0 basic 2 11 0 5 5 32 (0db) 32 (0db) 47 external busy tone 0 basic 1 11 0 32 (0db) 48 voice mail message waiting, special dial stutter dial tone (analog sets) 0 basic 2 9 0 1 1 32 (0db) 32 (0db) 49 --- not used --- 50 e...

  • Page 504

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 480 handset mute 80-01-02 service tone setup – basic tone number (default: 0). Refer to table 2-27 service tone setup, program 80-01-02 on page 2-480 . Operation while talking on a terminal handset: 1. Press mic (dth/dtr terminals only). - or - 2. Press ...

  • Page 505: Handsfree and Monitor

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c handsfree and monitor 2 - 481 handsfree and monitor description handsfree allows a multiline terminal user to process calls using the speaker and microphone in the telephone instead of the handset. Handsfree is a convenience for workers who do not have a fre...

  • Page 506

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 482 handsfree and monitor system availability terminals all multiline terminals required component(s) none programming 15-02-08 multiline telephone basic data setup – automatic handsfree set whether pressing a key accesses a one-touch key (1) or preselec...

  • Page 507

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c handsfree and monitor 2 - 483 operation to talk handsfree: 1. Press speaker, trunk line key or virtual extension key. 2. Place the call. 3. Speak toward the telephone when the called party answers. To change a handset call into a handsfree call: 1. Press spe...

  • Page 508

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 484 handsfree and monitor this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 509

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c handsfree answerback/forced intercom ringing 2 - 485 handsfree answerback/forced intercom ringing description handsfree answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced intercom call by speaking toward the telephone, without lifting the h...

  • Page 510

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 486 handsfree answerback/forced intercom ringing related features handsfree and monitor microphone cutoff programming 11-11-15 service code setup (for setup/entry operation) – enable handsfree incoming intercom calls if required, change the service code ...

  • Page 511

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c handsfree answerback/forced intercom ringing 2 - 487 operation to enable handsfree answerback for your incoming intercom calls: 1. Press idle speaker. 2. Dial 721. 3. Press speaker to hang up. This disables forced intercom ringing. To enable forced intercom ...

  • Page 512

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 488 handsfree answerback/forced intercom ringing this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 513: Headset Operation

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c headset operation 2 - 489 headset operation description a multiline terminal user can use a customer-provided headset in place of the handset. Like using handsfree, using the headset frees up the user’s hands for other work. However, headset operation provid...

  • Page 514

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 490 headset operation related features handsfree answerback/forced intercom ringing programmable function keys programming 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign a function key for headset operation (code 05). 20-02-05 system options for multiline te...

  • Page 515

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c headset operation 2 - 491 to use the headset: the headset key lights when on a call. To disconnect, press the headset key again. You can still use the handset for calls or respond to voice-announced intercom calls with the headset plugged in. The headset onl...

  • Page 516

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 492 headset operation this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 517: Hold

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c hold 2 - 493 hold description hold lets an extension user put a call in a temporary waiting state. The caller on hold hears silence or music on hold, not conversation in the extension user’s work area. While the call waits on hold, the extension user may pro...

  • Page 518

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 494 hold conditions the called extension must lift the handset or press speaker before the call can be placed on hold. Callers on hold hear music on hold, if programmed. An extension can have function keys for system hold and exclusive hold. Analog singl...

  • Page 519

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c hold 2 - 495 programming 11-12-30 service code setup (for service access) – specified trunk answer if required, redefine the service code used to answer a specific trunk which is either ringing or on hold (default: 672). 11-12-33 service code setup (for serv...

  • Page 520

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 496 hold 20-06-01 class of service for extensions assign a class of service (1~15) to an extension. 20-11-09 class of service options (hold/transfer service) – group hold initiate enable (1)/disable (0) an extension user ability to initiate group hold (s...

  • Page 521

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c hold 2 - 497 - or - if you know the specific line number, dial 672 + line number (001~200). Exclusive hold to place an outside call on exclusive hold: press the exclusive hold key (prg 15-07-01 or sc 751: 45). - or - press feature + hold. Single line telepho...

  • Page 522

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 498 hold 2. Dial 762. Single line telephone 1. Lift the handset. 2. Dial 762. Intercom hold to place an intercom call on intercom hold: 1. Press hold. 2. Press speaker to hang up. To pick up an intercom call on intercom hold: 1. Press speaker. 2. Press t...

  • Page 523: Hotel/motel

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c hotel/motel 2 - 499 hotel/motel description your elite ipk ii telephone system provides hotel/motel services in addition to the many features available to business users. These hotel/motel services help you run your facility more efficiently, save you time a...

  • Page 524

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 500 hotel/motel use wake up call as a meeting reminder (e.G., for convention attendees). Single digit dialing single digit dialing gives your guests one-touch access to your important hotel/motel services. They can lift the handset and press a single key...

  • Page 525

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c hotel/motel 2 - 501 the neax-90 with and without nak protocol is compatible with property management systems that support neax-90 protocol. Not all messages or functionality supported by neax model 90 protocol are implied or provided by the pms-u10. The pms-...

  • Page 526

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 502 hotel/motel flexible numbering plan to simplify dialing guests and services in your facility, customize your system to have room numbers match phone extension numbers. For example, if the rooms on the first floor are numbered 100~120, the correspondi...

  • Page 527

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c hotel/motel 2 - 503 program 30-03-01: dss console key assignment, function number 95: page switching is not supported in version 1600. Program 42-06-01~program 42-06-06: pms service setting, are not supported in version 1600. Default settings not enabled sys...

  • Page 528

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 504 hotel/motel related features code restriction department calling do not disturb flexible system numbering programming refer to the electra elite ipk ii hotel/motel services guide for complete programming information. Operation refer to the electra el...

  • Page 529: Hot Key-Pad

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c hot key-pad 2 - 505 hot key-pad description the hot key-pad feature allows the user to place a call without lifting the handset or pressing speaker. When the user dials another extension number on an idle telephone with hot key-pad enabled, speaker lights an...

  • Page 530

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 506 hot key-pad system availability terminals all multiline terminals required software: version 1500 or higher related features central office calls, placing class of service dialing number preview hotline intercom voice response system (vrs) programmin...

  • Page 531

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c hot key-pad 2 - 507 operation to place an intercom call using hot key-pad: dial the extension. To place a trunk call using hot key-pad: dial the trunk access code, 9 by default, and the number you want to call..

  • Page 532

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 508 hot key-pad this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 533: Hotline

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c hotline 2 - 509 hotline description hotline gives a multiline terminal user one-button calling and transfer to another extension (the hotline partner). Hotline helps co-workers that work closely together. The hotline partners can call or transfer calls to ea...

  • Page 534

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 510 hotline a hotline is a uniquely programmed function key. Default setting disabled related features automatic call distribution (acd) distinctive ringing, tones and flash patterns direct station selection do not disturb handsfree answerback/forced int...

  • Page 535

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c hotline 2 - 511 20-13-06 class of service options (supplementary service) – automatic off-hook signaling (automatic override) program 20-02-03 and program 20-13-06 set the conditions under which a hotline, reverse voice over or dss console key indicates that...

  • Page 536

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 512 hotline operation to place a call to your hotline partner: 1. Press the hotline key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 01 + partner’s extension number). You can optionally lift the handset after this step for privacy. To transfer your outside call to your hotline...

  • Page 537: Howler Tone Service

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c howler tone service 2 - 513 howler tone service description howler tone service provides a howler tone when a station remains off-hook after a call is completed or when a station is off-hook and digits are not dialed in a programmed time. Conditions howler t...

  • Page 538

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 514 howler tone service programming changing either of these two programs will require a ksu reset for the changes to take affect. 80-01-01 service tone setup – repeat count set repeat count for tone 16 lockout, default = 0 (endless). Refer to table 2-26...

  • Page 539: Intercom

    Intercom 2 - 515 i intercom description intercom gives extension users access to other extensions, and provides the system with complete internal calling ability. Handsfree answerback/forced intercom ringing handsfree answerback permits an extension user to respond to a voice-announced intercom call...

  • Page 540

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 516 intercom system availability terminals all terminals required component(s) none related features handsfree answerback/forced intercom ringing intercom line preference name storing programming for intercom: 11-11-13 service code setup (for setup/entry...

  • Page 541

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c intercom 2 - 517 20-08-01 class of service options (outgoing call service) – intercom calls enable (1)/disable (0) an extension user ability to place intercom calls. 20-08-11 class of service options (outgoing call service) – protect for the call mode switch...

  • Page 542

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 518 intercom 20-09-05 class of service options (incoming call service) – signal/voice call enable (1)/disable (0) an extension user ability to set handsfree answerback (service code 721) and forced intercom ringing (service code 723) for incoming interco...

  • Page 543

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c intercom 2 - 519 2. Dial the extension number. You display shows your telephone’s extension number, port number and extension/department group. You can also check any other extension numbers information y pressing help + the extension number. 3. Press exit t...

  • Page 544

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 520 intercom this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 545: Internal Hub

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c internal hub 2 - 521 internal hub description a network switch is a computer networking device that connects network segments. It uses the logic of a network bridge but allows a physical and logical star topology. The switch determines how and to which port ...

  • Page 546

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 522 internal hub back pressure for congestion on a half-duplex port, back pressure flow control is supported. Back pressure generates collision-detection signals in the csma/cd mac-layer (media access control) protocol of ethernet when a port is overload...

  • Page 547

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c internal hub 2 - 523 default setting none system availability terminals none required components: hub(8)-u( ) etu related features none programming 85-01-01 hub(8) lan setup – auto negotiation enable (1)/disable (0) auto negotiation. When enabled; link speed...

  • Page 548

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 524 internal hub 85-01-06 hub(8) lan setup – flow control, full-duplex full-duplex – 802-3x. When enabled (1), a switch applies flow control to a full-duplex ingress port while an output queue is congested. (only applicable when prg 85-01-01 is disabled ...

  • Page 549

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c internal hub 2 - 525 operation none.

  • Page 550

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 526 internal hub this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 551: Ip Extenders/mobile Connex

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip extenders/mobile connex 2 - 527 ip extenders/mobile connex description the ip extenders allow for a digital station to be extended to anywhere in the world, allowing seamless connection and functionality with the elite ipk ii system. The following are som...

  • Page 552

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 528 ip extenders/mobile connex supported compression rates and bandwidth are used. This is defined on a per-port bases. Branch (remote) unit the ip extender-branch is the remote unit to which the extended extension is connected to. There is an optional p...

  • Page 553

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip extenders/mobile connex 2 - 529 mobile connex users can access the following system features: transfer calls ( ## t) place calls on hold ( ## h) make conference calls ( ## c) make internal calls ( + internal extension) make trunk calls ( + 9+ number) the ...

  • Page 554

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 530 ip extenders/mobile connex related features electra elite ipk terminals programming extended extensions 10-03-01 etu setup terminal type (b1) for esi 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign function keys on multiline telephones of telephone that i...

  • Page 555: Ip Station (Megaco) – Iad

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (megaco) – iad (integrated access device) 2 - 531 ip station (megaco) – iad (integrated access device) description the iad(8)-u( ) etu with ip station (megaco) application loaded is an optional interface package for the electra elite ipk ii system...

  • Page 556

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 532 ip station (megaco) – iad (integrated access device) nat beater – network address translation for this feature, the iad(8)-u( ) etu is installed and assigned as an esi(8)-u( ) etu. Each iad(8)-u( ) etu supports up to eight ip phones and reduces the m...

  • Page 557

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (megaco) – iad (integrated access device) 2 - 533 the iad(8)-u( ) etu supports station to station direct rtp connections (peer-to-peer) for calls between ip phones that provide the following benefits: improved voice quality for calls between two i...

  • Page 558

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 534 ip station (megaco) – iad (integrated access device) terminals ith-16d-2/3 multiline terminal - or - ith-8d-2/3 multiline terminal - or - any ipk multiline terminal with ip-r (ipk) unit installed. - or - ipk soft phone required software version 1100 ...

  • Page 559

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (megaco) – iad (integrated access device) 2 - 535 operation none.

  • Page 560

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 536 ip station (megaco) – iad (integrated access device) this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 561

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (megaco) – mg 16 2 - 537 ip station (megaco) – mg 16 description the media gateway (mg16) is a ip application loaded on the pva(x)-u( ) etu. This is an optional interface package for the electra elite ipk ii system that supports megaco ip stations...

  • Page 562

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 538 ip station (megaco) – mg 16 an on-board 10 base-t/100 base-tx connector provides a wan/lan connection. Voice and signaling data to/from the ip stations are converted into ip frames and transmitted through the data communication ip network intranet or...

  • Page 563

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (megaco) – mg 16 2 - 539 each voice call requires at least the specifications listed in the following table. This includes all the overheads of voip communication, including signaling). The mg16 contains a regular tcp/rtp/ip stack that can handle ...

  • Page 564

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 540 ip station (megaco) – mg 16 registration override is a feature for overriding the registration of an ip phone from various locations. You have to know the ip address of the ip phone and the extension number of the phone you want to override. In voice...

  • Page 565

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (megaco) – mg 16 2 - 541 program 11-01-01 9: system numbering – dial extension analyze is not supported in version 1600. Program 11-20-01: dial extension analyze table – dial and program 11-20-02: dial extension analyze table – type of dials are n...

  • Page 566

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 542 ip station (megaco) – mg 16 sip trk – sip trunks ccis – ccis networking common – common usage for ccis networking, sip station, megaco stations, sip trunks pva combo card ccisoip application supports trunks configured in increments of four contiguous...

  • Page 567

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (megaco) – mg 16 2 - 543 system availability terminals ith-16d-2/3 multiline terminal - or - ith-8d-2/3 multiline terminal - or - any ipk multiline terminal with ip-r (ipk) unit installed. - or - ipk soft phone required component(s) pva(x)-u( ) et...

  • Page 568

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 544 ip station (megaco) – mg 16 related features none programming 10-16-03 option information setup – tftp server (version 1600 and 2100 or higher required) ip address 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.255.254 128.0.0.1 ~ 191.255.255.254 (default: 0.0.0.0) voip settings...

  • Page 569

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (megaco) – mg 16 2 - 545 84-06-02 voip info – rtcp port number define the media gateway card starting rtcp port number . The rtcp port number has to be the (rtp port number + 1). (default: 10021) 84-06-04 voip info – fract lost threshold define th...

  • Page 570

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 546 ip station (megaco) – mg 16 voip tos setup the elite ipk ii supports quality of service marking for the type of service and diffserve on the following voip applications: (mg16 and ccisoip packages) 84-10-01 tos setup – tos mode define the logic used ...

  • Page 571

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (megaco) – mg 16 2 - 547 84-07-03 firmware download setting – login name assign the user login name. (up to 24 characters) 84-07-04 firmware download setting – password assign the password. (up to 24 characters) ip terminal version information def...

  • Page 572

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 548 ip station (megaco) – mg 16 ip extension numbering: 11-02-01 extension numbering define the ip phone extension number. This designated extension is used to register your ip phone and is programmed ip phone programming. Refer to the installation instr...

  • Page 573

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (megaco) – mg 16 2 - 549 84-11-10 d term ip codec information basic setup – g729 jitter buffer average define g.729 jitter buffer average accepted value. (default: 60 ms) 84-11-11 d term ip codec information basic setup – g729 jitter buffer max de...

  • Page 574

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 550 ip station (megaco) – mg 16 operation example configuration 1 – static ip addressing, one lan: this example shows system ip phones connected to a single lan (no routers) with a static ip address. Programming – ipk ii cpuii 1. 10-12-01 ipk ii cpuii ne...

  • Page 575

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (megaco) – mg 16 2 - 551 2. Ip address = 192.168.1.200 3. Subnet mask = 255.255.255.0 4. Mgc address = 192.168.1.21, ext = 100 example configuration 2 – dynamic ip addressing, one lan: this example shows system ip phones connected to a single lan ...

  • Page 576

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 552 ip station (megaco) – mg 16 example configuration 3 – static ip addressing, routed lan: this example shows system ip phones connected to an elite ipk ii over a wide area network (wan) with static addressing. This is a typical scenario – a small branc...

  • Page 577

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (megaco) – mg 16 2 - 553 2. Ip address = 192.168.2.200 3. Subnet mask = 255.255.255.0 4. Default gateway = 192.168.2.254 codec selection ip phones can use various codecs (coder/decoder). A codec is a standard for converting an analog signal to a d...

  • Page 578

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 554 ip station (megaco) – mg 16 10. 84-11-10 g.729 jitter buffer average (default: 60 ms) 11. 84-11-11 g7.29 jitter buffer max (default: 120 ms) 12. 84-11-17 jitter buffer mode – support static or immediate (default: 2: immediate) 13. 84-11-18 voice acti...

  • Page 579

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (megaco) – mg 16 2 - 555 music on hold: music on hold is also provided by a multicast from the media gateway card (mg16). The setting in program 10-04-01 music on hold setup, is accepted whether or not music should be provided. Configuring ip phon...

  • Page 580

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 556 ip station (megaco) – mg 16 the following menu items require programming in your ip phone: program/ item no. Description/selection default assigned data comments 1 network setting dhcp disable 2 ip address 0.0.0.0 enter a static ip address for the ip...

  • Page 581

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (megaco) – mg 16 2 - 557 operation registration override for megaco phones the registration override feature gives users access to their ip telephone from any location by using the override login function. Users can log into their ip station in th...

  • Page 582

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 558 ip station (megaco) – mg 16 to configure an ip terminal for center download 1. Access ip terminal programming hold + transfer + + # . 2. Select option 9 – advance setting and select sub-menu option 3 – drs setting. You are required to enable drs mode...

  • Page 583: Ip Station (Sip) – Mg16

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (sip) – mg16 2 - 559 ip station (sip) – mg16 description sip (session initiation protocol) is used for voice over internet protocol. It is defined by the ietf (internet engineering task force) rfc3261. Other rfc designations, such as rfc 3842, ref...

  • Page 584

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 560 ip station (sip) – mg16 a maximum of 16 pva(x)-u( ) etus can be installed supporting the maximum of 256 ip stations (refer to table 2-43 maximum system capacities for application interface etus in the universal slots feature). T his may be a combinat...

  • Page 585

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (sip) – mg16 2 - 561 in voice communication, particularly internet telephony, the mean opinion score (mos) provides a numerical measure of the quality of human speech at the circuit destination. The scheme uses subjective tests (opinionated scores...

  • Page 586

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 562 ip station (sip) – mg16 ipk ii sip supports hold and trf feature on the basis of ietf draft. Draft-ietf-sipping-service-examples-09.Txt draft-ietf-sipping-cc-transfer-05.Txt draft-ietf-sip-session-timer-10.Txt when all voip dsp resources are busy, th...

  • Page 587

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (sip) – mg16 2 - 563 pva combo card ccisoip application supports trunks configured in increments of four contiguous dsp resources. Etu configuration – the pva combo card application package is identified as an mg_ccis etu. The pva combo card – voi...

  • Page 588

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 564 ip station (sip) – mg16 system availability terminals sip terminals compliant with rfc 3261, rfc 3262, rfc 3264 (session description protocol), rfc 1889 (real time protocol). Pva(x)-u20 etu with mg16 application package 1.51 or higher. Ipk ii cpu rel...

  • Page 589

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (sip) – mg16 2 - 565 84-05-01 voip ip address – ip address define the ip address of the voip application supported (mg16, ccisoip). (default: slot 1: 172.16.0.20) 84-05-02 voip ip address – lan interface define the lan interface speed and mode of ...

  • Page 590

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 566 ip station (sip) – mg16 voip tos setup the elite ipk ii supports quality of service (qos) marking for the session initiation protocol (sip). 84-10-01 tos setup – tos mode define your sip qos marking for type of service(tos) or diffserve. [1 = cpu, 2 ...

  • Page 591

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (sip) – mg16 2 - 567 84-19-09 sip extension ip codec information basic setup – g.729 jitter buffer (min) define g.711 jitter buffer minimum accepted value. (default: 30 ms) 84-19-10 sip extension ip codec information basic setup – g729 jitter buff...

  • Page 592

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 568 ip station (sip) – mg16 84-20-02 sip extension information basic setup – session timer value define the periodic refresh time (0~65535 seconds) that allows both user agents and proxies to determine if the sip session is still active. (default: 180) 8...

  • Page 593

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip station (sip) – mg16 2 - 569 15-05-18 ip telephone terminal basic data setup – ip duplication allowed group set the registered ip phone codec type – reference prg 84-11 dterm ip codec basic information. (default: 0:not used) sip phone example the followin...

  • Page 594

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 570 ip station (sip) – mg16 5 extension number 0 assign the sip phone extension. This information must match program 11-02-01 extension numbering. Program/ item no. Description/selection default assigned data comments.

  • Page 595: Ip Trunk – H.323 Protocol

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip trunk – h.323 protocol 2 - 571 ip trunk – h.323 protocol description the electra elite ipk ii voice over ip trunk card h.323 package sends the real-time voice over the corporate lan or wan. The voice from the telephone is digitized and then put into frame...

  • Page 596

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 572 ip trunk – h.323 protocol system availability terminals all multiline terminals required component(s) iad(8)-u10 etu – h.323 package related features none programming 10-03-01 etu setup 11-01-01 system numbering 14-02-01 analog trunk data setup – sig...

  • Page 597

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip trunk – (sip) session initiation protocol 2 - 573 ip trunk – (sip) session initiation protocol description the electra elite ipk ii voice over ip trunk card sip package sends real-time voice over the corporate lan or wan. The voice from the telephone is d...

  • Page 598

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 574 ip trunk – (sip) session initiation protocol conditions none default setting none system availability terminals all multiline terminals required component(s) iad(8)-u10 etu – sip package related features none programming 10-03-01 etu setup 11-01-01 s...

  • Page 599

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip trunk – (sip) session initiation protocol 2 - 575 44-05-01 ars/f-route table – trunk group number iad(8)-u( ) assigned as dti is allocated 24 trunk ports, but can use only the first eight ports. The remaining trunk ports should be assigned to trunk group ...

  • Page 600

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 576 ip trunk – (sip) session initiation protocol this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 601: Ip Trunk (Sip) – Mg16

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip trunk (sip) – mg16 2 - 577 ip trunk (sip) – mg16 description sip (session initiation protocol) is used for voice over ip (voip). It is described in the ietf (internet engineering task force) rfc3261. Commonly called sip trunking, this feature is used for ...

  • Page 602

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 578 ip trunk (sip) – mg16 for this feature, the media gateway 16 is installed and assigned as a voip mg16 etu. Each media gateway supports ip signaling for up to 16 (sip trunks and/or sip stations) and reduces the maximum capacity of sip trunk/stations i...

  • Page 603

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip trunk (sip) – mg16 2 - 579 the lan/wan connection is provided by a 10 base-t/100 base-tx ethernet connector. This connector is a single 10/100 mbps ethernet connector. This port has auto-medium dependent interface crossover (mdix) to allow using either a ...

  • Page 604

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 580 ip trunk (sip) – mg16 outgoing calls on sip are not possible under the following conditions: sip configuration failed sip registration failed cpuii and mg16 link down lack of mg16 dsp resource lack of mg16 bandwidth ipk ii sip does not support t.38 f...

  • Page 605

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip trunk (sip) – mg16 2 - 581 elite ipk ii program 10-40-02 number of sip ports ccisoip trunks pva(x)-u( ) etu license registration elite ipk ii program 10-40-03 ccisoip trunk availability elite ipk ii program 10-40-04 number of ccisoip ports the maximum num...

  • Page 606

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 582 ip trunk (sip) – mg16 pva(x)-u( ) etu/combo card led indications: non peer-to-peer megaco ip station and sip ip station calls are indicated by a flashing red led. Ccisoip trunk and sip trunk calls are indicated by a solid red led. Default setting non...

  • Page 607

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip trunk (sip) – mg16 2 - 583 84-05-01 voip ip address – ip address define the ip address of the voip application supported (mg16, ccisoip). (default: slot 1: 172.16.0.20) 84-05-02 voip ip address – lan interface define the lan interface speed and mode of th...

  • Page 608

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 584 ip trunk (sip) – mg16 sip trunk basic setup 10-40-01 sip trunk availability – sip trunk availability enable (1)/disable (0) sip trunking. (default: 0) 10-28-01 sip system information setup – domain name define the domain name. This information is gen...

  • Page 609

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip trunk (sip) – mg16 2 - 585 voip dsp resource 10-19-01 voip dsp resource selection (version 1600 or higher required) select type of voip etu dsp resource. This program setting has no affect on the terminal/ trunk port assignment or usage. Entries: 0 = comm...

  • Page 610

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 586 ip trunk (sip) – mg16 21-17-01 ip trunk (sip) calling party number setup for trunk assign the caller party number for each ip trunk. The assigned number is sent to the central office when the caller places an outgoing call. If the calling party numbe...

  • Page 611

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip trunk (sip) – mg16 2 - 587 84-13-07 sip trunk codec information basic setup – g.729 audio frame number set the g.729 audio frame number. Entries: 2~6 (default: 2) 2 = 20 ms 3 = 30 ms 4 = 40 ms 5 = 50 ms 6 = 60 ms 84-13-08 sip trunk codec information basic...

  • Page 612

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 588 ip trunk (sip) – mg16 84-13-27 sip trunk codec information basic setup – rx gain set the receive gain. Entries: 0~28 (-14dbm ~ +14dbm) (default: 10) 0 = -14dbm 1 = -13 dbm 14 = 0 dbm 27 = 13 dbm 28 = 14 dbm 84-13-28 sip trunk codec information basic ...

  • Page 613

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip trunk (sip) – mg16 2 - 589 sip napt router setup 10-12-06 cpuii network setup – napt router enable (1)/disable (0) the napt router setup. With sip trunking behind a napt router, this must be set to 1. (default: 0) 10-12-07 cpuii network setup – napt route...

  • Page 614

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 590 ip trunk (sip) – mg16 84-14-09 sip trunk basic information setup – called party information set the called party information. Entries: 0 = request uri, 1 = to header (default: 0) sip server information setup 10-29-01 sip server information setup – de...

  • Page 615

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ip trunk (sip) – mg16 2 - 591 10-29-06 sip server information setup – registrar ip address define the registrar ip address. The carrier may provide an ip address. In most cases, a domain name is used so this entry is left at the default. 0.0.0.0 ~ 126.255.25...

  • Page 616

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 592 ip trunk (sip) – mg16 90-11-01 through 90-11-13 system alarm report define the details of the system alarm report (multiline terminal to display alarms and email notification setup). Sip trunk registration information setup 10-36-01 sip trunk registr...

  • Page 617: Ipk II In-Mail

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii in-mail 2 - 593 ipk ii in-mail description the elite ipk ii in-mail is a low cost voice mail solution that mounts onto the cpuii. Its programming is fully integrated with ksu programming. This system offers most voice mail system features customers ex...

  • Page 618

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 594 ipk ii in-mail live record while on a call, an extension user can have in-mail record the conversation. The multiline terminal user can press the in-mail record key; and the esl user dials a code. Once recorded, the voice messaging system stores the ...

  • Page 619

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii in-mail 2 - 595 voice mail queuing when accessing the voice mail, the system provides a voice mail queue. If all the voice mail ports are busy, any call trying to get to the voice mail is placed in queue. As the voice mail ports become available, the ...

  • Page 620

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 596 ipk ii in-mail in-mail: external transfer available software allows in-mail to perform an external transfer. This allows the in-mail to route an incoming automated attendant call out of the electra elite ipk ii system on a new trunk based on a speed ...

  • Page 621

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii in-mail 2 - 597 4. In-mail searches the list of programmed extension names for a match of the caller-entered letters. 5. Voice prompts announce the first three matches, and allow the caller to dial a digit (1~3) to reach one of the announced matches. ...

  • Page 622

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 598 ipk ii in-mail when the voice mail places a call on hold, it uses group hold. Any line appearances for the trunk shows the hold flash rate, however, users cannot pick up these calls (a busy signal is heard). Updating the system time also updates the ...

  • Page 623

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii in-mail 2 - 599 system availability terminals all terminals required component(s) dspii-u10 unit ipk ii in-mail – 2 port, 8 hours ipk ii in-mail – 4 port, 8 hours related features automatic call distribution (acd) barge-in caller id call forwarding ce...

  • Page 624

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 600 ipk ii in-mail programming 10-09-01 dtmf and dial tone circuit setup assign at least one circuit for dtmf reception (type 0 or 1). Use the following as a guide when allocating dtmf receivers: in light traffic sites, allocate one dtmf receiver for eve...

  • Page 625

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii in-mail 2 - 601 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign a voice mail key to an extension. You must enter the voice mail key code (code 77) followed by: your own extension number if you are setting up your own voice mail key. A virtual extension num...

  • Page 626

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 602 ipk ii in-mail 20-13-01 class of service options (supplementary service) – long conversation alarm 20-13-05 class of service options (supplementary service) – intercom off-hook signaling 20-13-06 class of service options (supplementary service) – aut...

  • Page 627

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii in-mail 2 - 603 22-04-01 incoming extension ring group assignment assign ring group 102 for an in-skin/external voice mail, or 103 for a central voice mail as the destination. For either method: 22-04-01 incoming extension ring group assignment to ena...

  • Page 628

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 604 ipk ii in-mail 45-01-17 voice mail integration options – reply mailbox number select yes (1) to include or no (0) to not include the mailbox number in the analog voice mail protocol. A reply mailbox number. Default is 1. Version 1500 or higher is req...

  • Page 629

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii in-mail 2 - 605 47-12-01 through 47-12-08 ipki ii in-mail answer schedules 47-13-01 ipki ii in-mail dial action tables refer to the electra elite ipk ii in-mail system guide, for complete programming details. 80-03-01 dtmf tone receiver setup – detect...

  • Page 630

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 606 ipk ii in-mail 41-19-06 acd voice mail delay announcement – wait tone type at message interval. Version 2000 or higher is required. Options 0 = ring back tone 1 = moh tone 2 = bgm source (default: 0) 41-19-07 acd voice mail delay announcement – acd f...

  • Page 631

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii in-mail 2 - 607 47-05-01 master announcement mailbox options – next call routing mailbox if you set up an announcement mailbox for acd delay announcements, provide additional routing options to the automated attendant callers. Options number (01~16) u...

  • Page 632

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 608 ipk ii in-mail checking messages if prg 15-02-26 = 0 (message key): 1. Press the message key once. The user can use the vol up and vol down keys to view the new messages. If there are both voice mail messages and message waiting calls, the display in...

  • Page 633

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii in-mail 2 - 609 743 = call forward – no answer (prg 15-07 or sc 751: code 12) 744 = call forward – busy/no answer (prg 15-07 or sc 751: code 13) 2. Dial the voice mail master number. 3. Press speaker to hang up (or hang up handset at the single line t...

  • Page 634

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 610 ipk ii in-mail 2. Hang up. Recording your call to record your active call in your mailbox: multiline terminal 1. Press the voice mail record key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: code 78) you hear a beep and your record key flashes. The system beeps periodically...

  • Page 635

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii in-mail 2 - 611 when personal answering machine emulation broadcasts your caller’s message, you can: your telephone must be idle (not on a call). 1. Do nothing. The message is automatically being recorded in your mailbox. The broadcast stops when your...

  • Page 636

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 612 ipk ii in-mail 3. Enter the directory dialing mailbox number or press # to go back to the system administrator options. 4. Select one of the following options: l (5) = listen to the current directory dialing message (if any) # = exit listen mode r (7...

  • Page 637: Ipk II – Pc Assistant

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii – pc assistant 2 - 613 ipk ii – pc assistant description the elite pc assistant enhances the operation of the nec digital telephone set by providing easy access to common, and not so common, ipk ii voice control features. This software application pro...

  • Page 638

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 614 ipk ii – pc assistant elite pc assistant runs on a pc and communicates with the electra elite ipk ii through a normal digital station port using the ctu adapter attached to the telephone. When calls come into this station, the pc assistant displays i...

  • Page 639

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii – pc assistant 2 - 615 red phoenix telephony admin (cti server) cti license for cpuii( )-u10 etu optional component(s) the ct(u)-r unit is only supported on the esib(8)-u20 or esie(8)-u20 etu. Related features refer to the electra elite ipk ii pc assi...

  • Page 640

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 616 ipk ii – pc assistant this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 641: Ipk II – Pc Attendant

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii – pc attendant 2 - 617 ipk ii – pc attendant description the pc attendant console is a software product that provides access to the most common functions required by an operator or receptionist. By using this application in conjunction with an ipk ii ...

  • Page 642

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 618 ipk ii – pc attendant the host pc used as the cti server requires windows xp, windows 2000, or windows server 2003 and an interface to the ipk ii system through the 3rd-party cti link to monitor and control the telephone activity. When installing the...

  • Page 643

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii – pc attendant 2 - 619 related features refer to the ipk ii pc attendant manual for detailed feature information. Programming 10-12-01 cpuii network setup – ip address ipk ii ip address = 0~255.0~255.0~255.0~255 10-12-02 cpuii network setup – subnet m...

  • Page 644

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 620 ipk ii – pc attendant this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 645

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii voip management system 2 - 621 ipk ii voip management system description the electra elite ipk ii voip management (ivm) system efficiently monitors and manages the performance of enterprise voip networks and provides multiple monitoring tools for the ...

  • Page 646

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 622 ipk ii voip management system the ivm software, qovia central, supports display of the voip infrastructure in both a user-defined hierarchy and an application generated topology. The operation/performance of various voip devices is displayed in red, ...

  • Page 647

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii voip management system 2 - 623 schedule active packet testing at regular intervals or when a particular threshold is met run on-demand active packet tests with configurable settings, including test duration ups monitoring power status for all local an...

  • Page 648

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 624 ipk ii voip management system monitoring packets without compliant rtcp data (neax, most 3 rd party vendor systems) is not supported. System availability server minimum hardware requirements: pentium iii 1.5 ghz or faster cpu 512mb memory (1gb recomm...

  • Page 649

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii voip management system 2 - 625 switch support for snmp with bridge mib to enable discovery of ip terminals, iad station etus, or multiple iad trunks in a single ksu (not required at single ip trunk sites) switch support for port mirroring of all voip ...

  • Page 650

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 626 ipk ii voip management system megaco station card scenarios optional device configurations features summary (main site) network equipment ivm main discover phones monitor phones monitor station card perform active tests notification ipk hub etu/hub y...

  • Page 651

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii voip management system 2 - 627 figure 2-17 single ip trunk.

  • Page 652

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 628 ipk ii voip management system iad trunk (one iad at a site) optional device configurations features summary (any site) network equipment ivm monitor trunk perform active tests notification ipk hub etu/hub ys ys ys ys snmp switch (bridge mib and mirro...

  • Page 653

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii voip management system 2 - 629 figure 2-18 multiple iad (trunk/megaco station card.

  • Page 654

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 630 ipk ii voip management system multiple iad (trunk/megaco station card) scenarios optional device configurations features summary (main) network equipment ivm main discover phones monitor phones monitor station card perform active tests notification i...

  • Page 655

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii voip management system 2 - 631 remote ip trunk card site optional device configurations features summary (remote) network equipment ivm monitor trunk perform active tests notification ipk hub etu/hub ys ys ys ys snmp switch (bridge mib and mirroring) ...

  • Page 656

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 632 ipk ii voip management system figure 2-19 multiswitch site.

  • Page 657

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ipk ii voip management system 2 - 633 multiswitch station card scenarios optional device configurations features summary (main site) network equipment ivm main discover phones monitor phones monitor station card perform active tests notification ipk hub etu/...

  • Page 658

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 634 ipk ii voip management system switch configuration specifics switch a when the ivm is positioned on switch a, as shown in figure 2-19 multiswitch site , a majority of the telephone communication at the remote site can be monitored because it is a gat...

  • Page 659: Isdn Compatibility

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c isdn compatibility 2 - 635 isdn compatibility description isdn-bri integrated service digital network – basic rate interface (isdn-bri) is a public switched telephone network (pstn) service that provides two b channels and a d channel (2b + d) for voice call...

  • Page 660

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 636 isdn compatibility calling party number (cpn) presentation from station calling party number (cpn) presentation from station allows each unique station or virtual extension 10-digit number (representing the did number of the originating station) to b...

  • Page 661

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c isdn compatibility 2 - 637 pri ability requires the installation of dti-u40 etu with prt firmware version 5.Xx or higher. Each etu (also called a pri circuit) provides 24 pri channels (23b + d) 4 with 64k clear channel response. The t1/pri interface etu uses...

  • Page 662

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 638 isdn compatibility co line service is not supported. Isdn – pri cannot be configured for co emulation b-channel to trunk association when an incoming isdn-bri/pri call is received, the system assigns the lowest trunk number of the isdn circuit to the...

  • Page 663

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c isdn compatibility 2 - 639 basic rate interface (bri) caller id name to single line telephone is not supported for isdn (brt) trunks. The system is compatible with isdn basic rate interface (bri) services. Bri services currently supported include: basic bri ...

  • Page 664

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 640 isdn compatibility the two different spids for each bri line, are related to different trunk logical port numbers. One bri provides two trunk logical ports when it is connected to a co line. Each spid is assigned to a different tei. This relationship...

  • Page 665

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c isdn compatibility 2 - 641 system availability terminals not applicable required component(s) to provide isdn-pri trunk connection: dti-u40 etu to provide isdn-bri trunk connection: brt(4)-u20 etu nt-1 for each bri (locally provided) related features central...

  • Page 666

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 642 isdn compatibility programming isdn – bri installation 10-03-01 etu setup – for bri pkg set up and confirm the basic configuration data for each brt (4)-u20 etu. Select the isdn line mode 0 = not set 1 = t-bus (default) 10-03-03 etu setup – connectio...

  • Page 667

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c isdn compatibility 2 - 643 10-06-02 isdn bri setup – did mode select the method the system uses when assigning did mode to the bri circuit. 0 = route by called party number (default). 1 = route by redirecting number 10-06-03 isdn bri setup – spid 1 assign th...

  • Page 668

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 644 isdn compatibility 10-03-08 etu setup (for pri pkg setup) – dial sending mode set up and confirm the basic configuration data for each dti-u40 etu. 0 = enblock sending 1 = overlap sending (default) 10-03-09 etu setup (for pri pkg setup) – dial inform...

  • Page 669

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c isdn compatibility 2 - 645 22-11-02 translation number conversion – target number for each did translation table entry (1~2000), specify the extension the system dials after translation (24 digits maximum). 22-09-01 did basic data setup – expected number of ...

  • Page 670

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 646 isdn compatibility 21-13-01 isdn calling party number setup for extensions assign each extension a calling party number (maximum 16 digits per entry). The calling number is the subscriber number of the dial-in number. When a call is made by an extens...

  • Page 671

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c isdn compatibility 2 - 647 smdr dialed digits for either isdn – bri or pri 35-02-15 smdr output options – cli/did number switching determine if the cli/did number should be displayed. 0 = caller id number (default) 1 = did calling number 2 = caller id name 3...

  • Page 672

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 648 isdn compatibility 20-13-23 class of service options (supplementary service) – display the reason for transfer enable (1)/disable (0) an extension ability to display the reason (call forward, busy, no answer or dnd) a vrs, did, disa, or isdn call is ...

  • Page 673

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c isdn compatibility 2 - 649 programming flowchart for isdn-pri – answering calls start in 10-03-01, determine the mode of the dti( )-u40 etu (0=not set, 1=t-bus) in 10-03-03, enter '0'. In 10-03-03, enter '1'. In 10-03-04, select the layer 3 timer type (1-5)....

  • Page 674

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 650 isdn compatibility should the sub-address id be displayed for incoming calls? Is smdr used? In 20-09-03, set the extension's cos to '1'. In 20-09-03, set the extension's cos to '0'. In 35-02-16, enter '0' to print the trunk port name assigned in 14-0...

  • Page 675

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c isdn compatibility 2 - 651 b do you want unanswered pri calls to reroute if unanswered? In 22-01-04, enter 0. In 22-01-04, enter 0. Reroute do not reroute in 22-08-01, enter the no-answer ring group for unanswered pri calls. In 22-04-01, assign extension to ...

  • Page 676

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 652 isdn compatibility programming flowchart of isdn-pri – placing calls start in 10-03-01, determine the mode of the dti( )-u40 etu (0=not set, 1=t-bus) in 10-03-03, enter '0'. In 10-03-03, enter '1'. In 10-03-04, select the layer 3 timer type (1-5). Th...

  • Page 677

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c isdn compatibility 2 - 653 a should caller id be included in the call's setup message? In 15-01-04, enter 1 in 10-03-05 enter 1. In 15-01-04, enter 0 in 10-03-05 enter 0 no yes in 21-12-01, program the calling party number data (15 digits max.) for each trun...

  • Page 678

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 654 isdn compatibility b is the amount of time the system waits before placing the call in a talk state sufficient? In 21-01-03, enter the interval for the trunk interdigit timer. Should extension users have one-button placing of outside calls? Should ex...

  • Page 679: K-Ccis – Ip With Iad

    K-ccis – ip with iad 2 - 655 k k-ccis – ip with iad description this feature provides the benefits and additional feature compatibility of key-common channel interoffice signaling (k-ccis) between multiple systems including neax pbx systems connected together over a data communication ip network (in...

  • Page 680

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 656 k-ccis – ip with iad centralized day/night mode change (k-ccis) dial access to attendant (k-ccis) direct inward dialing – k-ccis dual hold – k-ccis elapsed time display – k-ccis flexible numbering of stations – k-ccis hands-free answerback – k-ccis h...

  • Page 681

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c k-ccis – ip with iad 2 - 657 g.711 -law – highest bandwidth g.729 – mid-range bandwidth g.723 – lowest bandwidth each voice call will require at least the bandwidth listed in the following table: data calls (modem data) across the voip connection are only ...

  • Page 682

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 658 k-ccis – ip with iad this feature allows point-to-multipoint, peer-to-peer connections for calls through the ip k-ccis network. If a call is transferred or forwarded to a different system in the network, the trunks in the transferring system are rele...

  • Page 683

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c k-ccis – ip with iad 2 - 659 default setting none system availability terminals all stations required software version 1100 or higher required component(s) iad(8)-u10 etu with ip cch for neaxpi application 1.00 or higher loaded related features ip station (m...

  • Page 684

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 660 k-ccis – ip with iad this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 685: K-Ccis – Ip With Pva

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c k-ccis – ip with pva 2 - 661 k-ccis – ip with pva description this feature provides the benefits and additional feature compatibility of key-common channel interoffice signaling (k-ccis) between multiple systems including neax pbx systems connected together ...

  • Page 686

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 662 k-ccis – ip with pva centralized billing – k-ccis centralized blf (k-ccis) centralized day/night mode change (k-ccis) dial access to attendant (k-ccis) direct inward dialing – k-ccis dual hold – k-ccis elapsed time display – k-ccis flexible numbering...

  • Page 687

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c k-ccis – ip with pva 2 - 663 the pva(x)-u( ) etu supports only those codecs that are approved to provide toll-quality speech paths. The following voice compression methods are supported for the ip cch for neax application: g.711 -law – highest bandwidth g.72...

  • Page 688

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 664 k-ccis – ip with pva this feature allows point-to-multipoint, peer-to-peer connections for calls through the ip k-ccis network. If a call is transferred or forwarded to a different system in the network, the trunks in the transferring system are rele...

  • Page 689

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c k-ccis – ip with pva 2 - 665 pva combo card service conditions version 2000 or higher is required to support the pva combo card application. If changing packages on the pva (for example k-ccis to combo), the previous card type must be deleted from the slot i...

  • Page 690

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 666 k-ccis – ip with pva sip trunks are defined as sip trk or common sip station are defined as ip ext or common when the pva combo card is installed in the electra elite ipk ii system, the system assigns the first available logical port numbers for ccis...

  • Page 691

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c k-ccis – ip with pva 2 - 667 pva(x)-u( ) etu with pva combo application package 1.00 or higher and elite ipk ii cpuii version 2000 or higher. Related features ip station – (megaco) mg 16 voice over programming refer to the electra elite ipk ii key-common cha...

  • Page 692

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 668 k-ccis – ip with pva this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 693: K-Ccis – T1

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c k-ccis – t1 2 - 669 k-ccis – t1 description key-common channel interoffice signaling (k-ccis) allows multiple systems to be connected together to provide additional feature compatibility, above what normal tie lines provide. The system is configured with the...

  • Page 694

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 670 k-ccis – t1 direct inward dialing – k-ccis dual hold – k-ccis elapsed time display – k-ccis flexible numbering of stations – k-ccis hands-free answerback – k-ccis hot line – k-ccis ip (k-ccis) ip (k-ccis) to neax (point-to-multipoint) link reconnect ...

  • Page 695

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c k-ccis – t1 2 - 671 outgoing co calls in a k-ccis network can be routed over the k-ccis link and use the distant system co lines. Distant system extension numbers in the k-ccis network can be assigned to feature access or one touch keys and speed dial buffer...

  • Page 696

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 672 k-ccis – t1 centralized e911 – k-ccis is supported. When centralized e911 – k-ccis is not used, each electra elite ipk ii system in a k-ccis network must have at least one trunk for emergency 911 calls. Using a neax-to-electra elite ipk ii network, t...

  • Page 697

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c k-ccis – t1 2 - 673 system availability terminals all stations required component(s) dti-u30 etu or higher cch(4)-u( ) etu with firmware 5.0x or higher the following table shows the ksu system software compatibility with cch(4)-u( ) firmware and k-ccis featu...

  • Page 698

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 674 k-ccis – t1 this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 699: Last Number Redial

    Last number redial 2 - 675 l last number redial description last number redial allows an extension user to quickly redial the last number dialed. For example, a user may quickly recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the digits. Last number redial saves in system memory the last...

  • Page 700

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 676 last number redial related features automatic route selection repeat redial save number dialed programming 11-12-12 service code setup (for service access) – last number dial assign a service code (#5) to use last number dial. 11-12-17 service code s...

  • Page 701

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c last number redial 2 - 677 1. At the multiline terminal, press speaker or lift the handset (optional). The system automatically selects a trunk from the same group as your original call. 2. Press redial. - or - at the single line telephone, lift the handset....

  • Page 702

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 678 last number redial this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 703: Licensing

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c licensing 2 - 679 licensing description licenses are used to activate certain features and applications for the electra elite ipk ii. The ipk ii provides the following licenses: cpu licenses the ipk ii cpu can be licensed for the following features: inacd – ...

  • Page 704

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 680 licensing conditions temporary 10-day license can be activated only from a multiline terminal, not pcpro, or webpro. Each time the temporary license is activated, the program is read only until the temporary license expires. Each time the temporary l...

  • Page 705

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c licensing 2 - 681 the 30 day promo license can be activated only from pcpro or webpro, not a multiline terminal. If any cpuii license is activated when the promo licensing is being used, the cpuii license resets with only the activated license(s). Applicatio...

  • Page 706

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 682 licensing system availability terminals n/a required component(s) refer to the particular feature for required component(s) related features programming from a multiline terminal programming 90-37-01 temporary license – number of days assign the numb...

  • Page 707: Line Preference

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c line preference 2 - 683 line preference description line preference determines how a multiline terminal user places and answers calls. There are two types of line preference: incoming line preference and outgoing line preference. Incoming line preference inc...

  • Page 708

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 684 line preference default setting enabled system availability terminals multiline terminals required component(s) none related features direct inward line ring groups trunk groups programming 14-05-01 trunk group – trunk group number for auto-answer of...

  • Page 709

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c line preference 2 - 685 15-01-02 basic extension data setup – outgoing trunk line preference enable (1)/disable (0) outgoing trunk line preference for extensions. 15-02-10 multiline telephone basic data setup – ringing line preference for trunk calls enable ...

  • Page 710

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 686 line preference operation ringing trunk or intercom (icm) call: lift the handset or press speaker. The setting assigned for prg 15-02-10 and prg 22-01-01 determines which call is answered first..

  • Page 711: Long Conversation Cutoff

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c long conversation cutoff 2 - 687 long conversation cutoff description for incoming and outgoing central office calls, each trunk can be programmed to disconnect after a defined time. The time begins when the trunk is seized and the call disconnects after the...

  • Page 712

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 688 long conversation cutoff related features central office calls, answering central office calls, placing direct inward system access (disa) tie lines warning tone for long conversation programming 14-01-14 basic trunk data setup – long conversation cu...

  • Page 713

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c long conversation cutoff 2 - 689 operation this feature is automatic once it is programmed..

  • Page 714

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 690 long conversation cutoff.

  • Page 715: Meet Me Conference

    Meet me conference 2 - 691 m meet me conference description with meet me conference, an extension user can set up a conference with their current call and up to 31 other internal or external parties. Each party joins the conference by dialing a meet me conference code. Meet me conference lets extens...

  • Page 716

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 692 meet me conference related features conference meet me paging programmable function keys programming for additional programming for paging, refer to the paging external and paging internal features. 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign function...

  • Page 717

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c meet me conference 2 - 693 single line telephone 1. While on a call, hookflash and dial #1. 2. Dial 703 and the external paging zone code (1~8 or 0 for all call). - or - dial 1 and the combined paging zone code 1~8 (for internal/external zones 1~8) or 0 (for...

  • Page 718

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 694 meet me conference 4. When a co-worker answers your page, press hookflash twice. 5. Repeat steps 1~4 for each co-worker you want to add. To join a meet me internal conference: 1. At the multiline terminal, press speaker (or lift the handset). - or - ...

  • Page 719: Meet Me Paging

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c meet me paging 2 - 695 meet me paging description meet me paging allows an extension user to page a co-worker and privately meet with them on a page zone. The paging zone is busy to other users while the meeting takes place. While the co-workers meet on the ...

  • Page 720

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 696 meet me paging related features meet me conference meet me paging transfer paging, external paging, internal programmable function keys programming for additional programming information on paging, refer to the paging, external and paging, internal f...

  • Page 721

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c meet me paging 2 - 697 3. Announce the zone. - or - 1. At the multiline terminal, press the external paging zone key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 19 + zone). 2. Announce the zone. To join a meet me external page: 1. At the multiline terminal, press speaker or pick ...

  • Page 722

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 698 meet me paging 2. Dial 763 (if your extension is in the zone called). - or - dial 764 and the zone number (if your extension is not in the zone called). - or - press the meet me conference/paging pickup key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 23) if your extension...

  • Page 723: Meet Me Paging Transfer

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c meet me paging transfer 2 - 699 meet me paging transfer description if a user wants to transfer a call to a co-worker but they do not know where the co-worker is, they can use meet me paging transfer. With meet me paging transfer, the user can page the co-wo...

  • Page 724

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 700 meet me paging transfer related features meet me conference meet me paging paging, external paging, internal programmable function keys programming for additional programming information on paging, refer to the paging, external and paging, internal f...

  • Page 725

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c meet me paging transfer 2 - 701 2. Press the external paging zone key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 19 + zone). - or - dial 703 and the external paging zone code (1~8 or 0 for all call). - or - dial 1 and the combined paging zone code 1~8 (for internal/external zone...

  • Page 726

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 702 meet me paging transfer 2. Press internal paging zone key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 20 + zone). - or - dial 701 and the internal paging zone code (0~9 or 00~64). - or - dial 1 and the combined paging zone code 1~8 (for internal/external zones 1~8) or 0 (...

  • Page 727: Memo Dial

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c memo dial 2 - 703 memo dial description while on an outside call, memo dial lets a multiline terminal user store an important number for easy redialing later on. The telephone can be like a notepad. For example, a user could dial directory assistance and ask...

  • Page 728

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 704 memo dial related features central office calls, placing last number redial save number dialed programming 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign a function key for memo dial (code 31). Operation to store a number while you are on a call: 1. Whil...

  • Page 729

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c memo dial 2 - 705 to cancel (erase) a stored memo dial number: 1. Press speaker. 2. Press the memo dial key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 31)..

  • Page 730

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 706 memo dial this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 731: Message Waiting

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c message waiting 2 - 707 message waiting description an extension user can leave a message waiting indication at a busy or unanswered extension requesting a return call. The indication is a flashing mw lamp at the called extension and a lighted mw lamp on the...

  • Page 732

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 708 message waiting this option is not available with a networked voice mail – the voice mail must be local. Refer to the voice mail integration (analog) on page 2-1057 feature for the feature operation. Led color indication the software allows you to se...

  • Page 733

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c message waiting 2 - 709 default setting enabled system availability terminals all terminals required component(s) none related features handsfree answerback/forced intercom ringing hotel/motel programmable function keys voice mail message indication on line ...

  • Page 734

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 710 message waiting 15-02-35 multiline telephone basic data setup – message waiting lamp cycle for calling extension (version 1600 or higher required) this option allows you to select the message waiting flash pattern for the station that set the message...

  • Page 735

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c message waiting 2 - 711 20-06-01 class of service for extensions assign a class of service (1~15) to an extension. 20-13-07 class of service options (supplementary service) – message waiting enable (1)/disable (0) an extension user ability to leave messages ...

  • Page 736

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 712 message waiting to cancel all your messages waiting: this includes messages you have left for other extensions and messages other extension have left for you. 1. At the multiline terminal, press speaker. - or - at the single line telephone, lift the ...

  • Page 737: Microphone Cutoff

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c microphone cutoff 2 - 713 microphone cutoff description microphone cutoff lets a multiline terminal user turn off their telephone handsfree or handset microphone anytime. When activated, microphone mute prevents the caller from hearing conversations in the u...

  • Page 738

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 714 microphone cutoff related features handsfree answerback/forced intercom ringing handset mute programmable function keys programming 15-07-01 programmable function keys if an extension needs handset microphone cutoff, program a handset transmission cu...

  • Page 739: Multiline Conference Bridge

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c multiline conference bridge 2 - 715 multiline conference bridge description multiline conference bridge allows any intercom or outside caller to call the cnf(8)-u( ) etu to place a multiparty conference call. Each cnf(8)-u( ) etu supports one 8-party confere...

  • Page 740

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 716 multiline conference bridge required component(s) cnf(8)-u( ) etu related features none programming 10-09-01 dtmf and dial tone circuit setup assign at least one circuit for dtmf reception (type 0 or 1). Use the following as a guide when allocating d...

  • Page 741

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c multiline conference bridge 2 - 717 operation setup procedures to set the supervisor password: 1. Call the conference bridge extension number, and wait for the voice prompt. 2. Dial the default supervisor password (0 0 0 0), then dial #. 3. Follow the voice ...

  • Page 742

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 718 multiline conference bridge to start a conference call using outside dit: 1. Call a trunk that is set as dit to conference bridge. 2. When the voice prompt is heard, enter the conference bridge 1 or 2 password, and dial #. 3. Start the conference. To...

  • Page 743: Multimedia Conference Bridge

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c multimedia conference bridge 2 - 719 multimedia conference bridge description the cnf(16)-u20 etu is a multimedia conference bridge that is used in the electra elite ipk ii. This etu can be configured as an 8-port or 16-port conference bridge. The multimedia...

  • Page 744

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 720 multimedia conference bridge simple mode when configured as an 8-port etu the following conferences are available: one 8-party conference two 4-party conferences (default) when configured as a 16-port etu the following conferences and conditions are ...

  • Page 745

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c multimedia conference bridge 2 - 721 the cnf(16)-u20 etu is a standalone conference bridge that cannot be linked with another cnf etu to increase the number of conferences. Conference ports should be placed in a class of service (cos) with no enabled alert t...

  • Page 746

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 722 multimedia conference bridge default setting none system availability terminals all terminals required component(s) cnf(16)-u20 etu -or- pva(x)-u10 etu with required service pack and application firmware setup procedures after the multimedia conferen...

  • Page 747

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c multimedia conference bridge 2 - 723 gateway: 0.0.0.0 the pc and cnf etu must be connected using either a straight ethernet cable, crossover cable, or a small hub. The cnf(16)-u20 etu uses medium dependent interface crossover (mdix) sensing protocol that all...

  • Page 748

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 724 multimedia conference bridge to join a conference from an outside location: 1. Dial the number associated with the conference pilot number. 2. Dial conference password, and press # . 3. Record name at prompt, and press # . 4. Enter the conference..

  • Page 749: Multiple Trunk Types

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c multiple trunk types 2 - 725 multiple trunk types description the ipk ii supports many different trunks in the system (did, e&m tie lines, loop start, ground start, isdn bri, isdn pri, and t-1 trunks). The system supports up to 200 trunks in the system, with...

  • Page 750

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 726 multiple trunk types isdn bri refer to the isdn compatibility on page 2-635 feature for related information. Isdn pri refer to the isdn compatibility on page 2-635 feature for related information. T-1 trunks refer to the t1 trunking (with ani/dnis co...

  • Page 751

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c multiple trunk types 2 - 727 default setting none system availability terminals all terminals required component(s) any trunk etu related features automatic route selection call appearance (cap) keys caller id direct inward dialing (did) isdn compatibility t...

  • Page 752

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 728 multiple trunk types 22-02-01 incoming call trunk setup for each night service mode, enter service type for each trunk. 81-10-01 coi initial data setup – dp interdigit time selection select the dp interdigit time (minimum pause time between dial puls...

  • Page 753

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c multiple trunk types 2 - 729 14-05-01 trunk group – trunk group number program tie lines of similar type into the same trunk group. The system uses trunk groups for outgoing access to tie lines (i.E., service code 704 + group). Also see program 34-05-01. Opt...

  • Page 754

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 730 multiple trunk types 21-05-01 toll restriction class – international call restriction table 21-05-02 toll restriction class – international call permit code table 21-05-04 toll restriction class – maximum number of digits table assignment 21-05-05 to...

  • Page 755

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c multiple trunk types 2 - 731 34-02-01 e&m tie line class of service assign the tie line class of service (1~15). Use program 20-14-01 to set the tie line class of service options. You cannot use program 20-06 ~ program 20-17 to assign class of service to tie...

  • Page 756

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 732 multiple trunk types 80-03-01 through 80-03-08 dtmf tone receiver setup 80-04-01 through 80-04-09 call progress tone detector setup if required, modify the criteria for dial tone detection and call progress tone detection for tie line calls. 81-11-01...

  • Page 757

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c multiple trunk types 2 - 733 81-11-10 tie line initial setup – wink/delay signal detect timeout selection specify a maximum time for receiving an acknowledgment signal from a distant system before sending a busy tone. (default: 7 seconds) 81-11-11 tie line i...

  • Page 758

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 734 multiple trunk types this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 759: Music On Hold

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c music on hold 2 - 735 music on hold description music on hold (moh) sends music to calls on hold and parked calls. The music lets the caller know that his call is waiting, not forgotten. Without music on hold, the system provides silence to these types of ca...

  • Page 760

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 736 music on hold the pgd(2)-u10 adp can be connected only to an esib(8)-u20 etu. If the pgd(2)-u10 adp is connected to an esie(8)-u20 etu, the pgd(2)-u10 adp is not recognized. When an esib(8)-u20 etu has an esie(8)-u20 etu installed [esib/e(16)], the p...

  • Page 761

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c music on hold 2 - 737 programming start in 14-08-01, enter 0. Should a trunk use the cpu, or the external source connected to the bgm or aci port for moh? In 10-03-01, confirm the pgd(2)-u10 adp to be used for external music source is recognized and has type...

  • Page 762

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 738 music on hold 10-04-01 music on hold setup – music on hold source selection determine whether the system should use no tone (0), external (1) music source, or internal service tone (2). If set to 1, program 14-08-01 must be set to 0 or 1. (default: 2...

  • Page 763

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c music on hold 2 - 739 33-01-01 aci port type setup set each aci software ports for input (1) or input/output (2). Use input ports for music on hold sources. Use output ports for external paging/ringer control. Aci ports: 1~96 (default: 2) 33-02-01 aci depart...

  • Page 764

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 740 music on hold this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 765: Name Storing

    Name storing 2 - 741 n name storing description extensions and trunks can have names instead of just circuit numbers. These names show on a multiline terminal display when the user places or answers calls. Extension and trunk names make it easier to identify callers. The user does not have to refer ...

  • Page 766

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 742 name storing if a name is not assigned to the extension/virtual extensions, it does not show in the extension directory. Extension directory only shows telephones/virtual extensions that have a name assigned in prg 15-01-01. Default setting enabled s...

  • Page 767

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c name storing 2 - 743 20-13-47 class of service options (supplementary service) – station number display (version 1600 or higher required) enable (1)/disable (0)) the station number display when the telephone is idle. (default: 1) 20-13-48 class of service op...

  • Page 769: Night Service

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c night service 2 - 745 night service description night service lets system users activate one of the night service modes. Night service redirects calls to their night mode destination, as determined by assigned and universal night answer programming. A user t...

  • Page 770

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 746 night service automatic night service the system allows or denies automatic night service. If allowed, the calls route according to the service patterns programmed. The night service programming is stored in the ram memory. This means that if the sys...

  • Page 771

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c night service 2 - 747 default setting system is always in mode 1 system availability terminals not applicable required component(s) none related features central office calls, answering central office calls, placing direct station selection paging, external ...

  • Page 772

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 748 night service 11-12-43 service code setup (for service access) – answer no-ring line (universal answer) customize the service code (#0) used to manually answer a universal night answer. 11-12-50 service code setup (for service access) – general purpo...

  • Page 773

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c night service 2 - 749 15-06-01 trunk access map for extensions for universal night answer (una) answering, assign trunk access maps (1~200) to extensions. Make one entry for each night service mode. 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign night service fu...

  • Page 774

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 750 night service 31-05-01 universal night answer/ring over page for each night service mode, assign which trunks should ring which external paging zones. Operation to activate night service by dialing codes: 1. At a multiline terminal, press speaker. - ...

  • Page 775: Off-Hook Signaling

    Off-hook signaling 2 - 751 o off-hook signaling description off-hook ringing alerts a multiline terminal user that an incoming outside call is ringing to that station during another call. Off-hook signaling helps important callers get through, without waiting in line for the called extension to beco...

  • Page 776

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 752 off-hook signaling block manual off-hook signals this class of service option enables/disables a busy extension user ability to block off-hook signals manually sent from a co-worker. If disabled (not blocked), callers can dial at busy or busy/ ring t...

  • Page 777

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c off-hook signaling 2 - 753 system availability terminals all multiline and single line terminals required component(s) none related features callback call waiting/camp-on direct inward dialing (did) handsfree and monitor hotline intercom one-touch calling pr...

  • Page 778

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 754 off-hook signaling 15-02-12 multiline telephone basic data setup – off-hook ringing for each extension, set off-hook ringing type: 0 (muted), 1 (none), 3 (beep in speaker), 4 (beep in handset), 5 (speaker & handset beep). Did, dnis and dil trunks can...

  • Page 779

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c off-hook signaling 2 - 755 operation to send off-hook signals to an extension busy on a call: your extension may send off-hook signals automatically. 1. Dial 7. - or - press off-hook signaling key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 33). You hear ringback. To have your ca...

  • Page 780

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 756 off-hook signaling this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 781: One-Digit Dial Option

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c one-digit dial option 2 - 757 one-digit dial option description when a caller to an acd group is being played a voice response system (vrs) delay announcement they can dial a one-digit option to dial out of the group. The one-digit dial out option can be pre...

  • Page 782

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 758 one-digit dial option related features automatic call distribution (acd) voice response system (vrs) programming 41-08-03 acd overflow options – delay announcement source type for each acd group (1~64), assign the announcement message types. Delay an...

  • Page 783

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c one-digit dial option 2 - 759 41-11-01 vrs delay announcement – delay message start timer for each acd group (01~64), determine the time (0~64800 seconds) the system waits before playing the delay message. This program is activated when the delay announcemen...

  • Page 784

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 760 one-digit dial option operation none.

  • Page 785: One-Touch Calling

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c one-touch calling 2 - 761 one-touch calling description one-touch calling gives a multiline terminal user one-button access to extensions, trunks, speed dial bins and selected system features. This saves users time when accessing co-workers, clients and feat...

  • Page 786

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 762 one-touch calling the @ symbol can be entered in the dial string of a dss/one touch button. The @ applies only to isdn and intercom calls. When using the @, the system waits for the destination to answer (answer supervision), and then sends the rest ...

  • Page 787

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c one-touch calling 2 - 763 operation programmable function keys to define a programmable function key as a one-touch key: 1. Dial the service code for function key programming (prg 11-11-17, 751 by default). 2. Press the key to be defined. 3. Dial 01 (dss/one...

  • Page 788

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 764 one-touch calling for central office calls, placing (trunk calling): a. A. Dial the general trunk access code (9). - or - dial the specific trunk service code (#9) plus the trunk number (e.G., 005). - or - dial the trunk group service code (704) plus...

  • Page 789: Operator

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c operator 2 - 765 operator description when an extension user dials 0, calls are routed to a main system operator. The operator can answer and route outside calls or locate employees using the page feature. A maximum of eight operators are available. Conditio...

  • Page 790

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 766 operator required component(s) none related features attendant call queuing programming 20-01-01 system options – operator access mode set up priority of a call when calling an operator telephone (0 = step, 1 = circular). (default: 0) 20-17-01 operat...

  • Page 791: (Opx) Off-Premise Extension

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c (opx) off-premise extension 2 - 767 (opx) off-premise extension description off-premise extension allows a single line telephone, located remotely from the main installation site, to access the system features with the same abilities as an on-premise single ...

  • Page 792

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 768 (opx) off-premise extension programming refer to single line telephones, analog 500/2500 sets on page 2-883 for related programming. Operation normal call handling procedures for single line telephones apply..

  • Page 793: Paging, External

    Paging, external 2 - 769 p paging, external description with external paging, a user can broadcast announcements over paging equipment connected to external paging zones. When a user pages on of these external zones, the system broadcasts the announcement over the speakers. Like internal paging, ext...

  • Page 794

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 770 paging, external did and dil trunks do not ring external page speakers. Only trunks defined as normal in program 22-02-01 ring external page speakers. Paging keys can be assigned on programmable function keys and direct station selection (dss) consol...

  • Page 795

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c paging, external 2 - 771 required component(s) esib(8)-u20 etu for pgd(2)-u10 adp esie(8)-u20 etu for 2nd channel support pgd(2)-u10 adp for zone paging 1- or 2-way amplifier and speakers (locally provided) related features central office calls, placing dire...

  • Page 796

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 772 paging, external 20-13-29 class of service options (supplementary service) – paging display turn off (0) or on (1) an extension user ability to display incoming internal paging information. (default: 1) 31-01-02 system options for internal/external p...

  • Page 797

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c paging, external 2 - 773 - or - 1. At the multiline terminal, press speaker or pick up the handset. - or - at single line telephone, lift the handset. 2. Dial 703 and the external paging zone code (1~8 or 0 for all call). - or - dial 1 and the combined pagin...

  • Page 798

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 774 paging, external this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 799: Paging, Internal

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c paging, internal 2 - 775 paging, internal description internal paging lets extension users broadcast announcements to other multiline terminal users. When a user makes a zone paging announcement, the announcement broadcasts to all idle extensions in the zone...

  • Page 800

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 776 paging, internal a single line telephone can initiate an internal zone page, but cannot receive an internal zone page. Default setting enabled system availability terminals all multiline terminals single line telephones required component(s) none rel...

  • Page 801

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c paging, internal 2 - 777 20-13-29 class of service options (supplementary service) – paging display turn off (0) or on (1) an extension user ability to display incoming internal paging information.(default: 1) 31-01-01 system options for internal/external pa...

  • Page 802

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 778 paging, internal 00 for all call). - or - 1. Press speaker or lift the handset. 2. Dial 701 and the paging zone number (0~9 or 00~64). Dialing 0 or 00 calls all call internal paging. - or - dial 1 and the combined paging group code 1~8 or 0 (for inte...

  • Page 803: Park

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c park 2 - 779 park description park places a call in a waiting state (called a park orbit) so that an extension user may pick it up. There are two types of park: system and personal. Use system park when you want to have the call wait in a system orbit. Perso...

  • Page 804

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 780 park when the terminal that has a call in personal park is unplugged, the personal park is released and the held caller is placed on non-exclusive hold. The following table indicates what condition the service codes and programmable function key can ...

  • Page 805

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c park 2 - 781 system availability terminals al terminals required component(s) none related features caller id call arrival (car) keys direct station selection hold programmable function keys programming 11-12-31 service code setup (for service access) – park...

  • Page 806

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 782 park park key (code 07). 15-18-01 virtual extension key enhanced options – virtual extension key operation mode set whether an incoming call to a virtual extension/car resides on the virtual extension/car key once answered (1) or appears on a cap key...

  • Page 807

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c park 2 - 783 3. Press speaker to hang up. If not picked up, the call recalls to you. - or - 1. At the multiline terminal or 2-button telephone, press hold. - or - at a 500/2500 single line telephone, hookflash. 2. Dial # 6 and the park orbit (01~64). If you ...

  • Page 808

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 784 park 2. Press the personal park key (prg 15-07 or sc 752: 07). - or - press hold and dial 757. - or - press hold and the personal park key (prg 15-07 or sc 752: 07). At a 500/2500 single line telephone, hookflash instead of pressing hold. A confirmat...

  • Page 809

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c park 2 - 785 to display caller id for a call in park: with program 15-02-08 set to 0 (preselect) for this feature. 1. With program 15-02-08 set to 0 (preselect) and a call in park, press the park key. (prg 15-07 or sc 752: 04). - or - with program 15-02-08 s...

  • Page 810

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 786 park this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 811: Pbx Compatibility

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c pbx compatibility 2 - 787 pbx compatibility description you can connect your telephone system trunks to centrex/pbx lines, rather than telco trunk circuits. This makes the trunk inputs to the system 500/2500 type compatible centrex/pbx extensions, rather tha...

  • Page 812

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 788 pbx compatibility except for dialing the pbx access code, users place calls on pbx trunks just like other trunks. All relevant access programming applies. Refer to the central office calls, placing on page 2-195 feature for more details. You can have...

  • Page 813

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c pbx compatibility 2 - 789 related features account code entry call forwarding – centrex central office calls, answering central office calls, placing code restriction direct inward line (dil) direct inward system access (disa) flash pulse to tone conversion ...

  • Page 814

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 790 pbx compatibility 14-04-01 behind pbx setup – type of connection for each pbx trunk port, enter 1. Make a separate entry for each night service mode. 21-04-01 toll restriction class for extensions assign a toll restriction class (1~15) to each extens...

  • Page 815

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c pbx compatibility 2 - 791 4. Dial the pbx access code and number. - or - 1. Press the pbx trunk key (prg 15-07 or sc 752: 01 + 1 to 200). 2. Dial the pbx access code and number. In all cases above, toll restriction may prevent your call..

  • Page 816

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 792 pbx compatibility this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 817: Pc Programming

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c pc programming 2 - 793 pc programming description ipk ii introduces three different methods for programming. The first is via the handset, the second is by pcpro (sat) and third by webpro. Pcpro is a microsoft windows™ based application. It stems from the sa...

  • Page 818

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 794 pc programming an overview of the three programming applications is given below. Enhancements ipk to ipk ii conversion – with version 1100 or higher, pcpro, in conjunction with a new version of ipk sat, can convert an ipk database to ipk ii. Not ever...

  • Page 819

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c pc programming 2 - 795 ip (lan) connections are established via the ethernet connector on the cpuii card. Figure 2-21 pcpro connection dialog box set up the com port to match the kts (prg 10-21-02 on the kts) ip address of the kts (prg 10-12-01 on the kts) u...

  • Page 820

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 796 pc programming if using webpro, a user can connect only via ip. To connect, launch a web browser (i.E., ie or mozilla) and enter the ip address of the switch (refer to figure 2-22 webpro login screen .) conditions the hardware/software requirements f...

  • Page 821

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c pc programming 2 - 797 the hardware/software requirements for the host pc running webpro are: you can have a maximum of four users logged into webpro anytime. You can have up to two phones in programming mode anytime. You can have four webpro users and two p...

  • Page 822

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 798 pc programming to access the modem over k-ccis, route the modem access service code to the target switch. Do not call a station that is call forwarded to the service code. When accessing the modem over k-ccis, enter the service code to be dialed in p...

  • Page 823

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c pc programming 2 - 799 required component(s) each copy of installed pc programming requires a license. Related features none programming 10-12-01 cpuii network setup – ip address assign the cpu ip address if pc programming is required via lan. This program i...

  • Page 824

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 800 pc programming 90-26 program access level setup define access levels to each program. This program defines which administrator accounts in prg 90-02 can access the program. If a program is not accessible, it does not appear in pcpro/ webpro. Operatio...

  • Page 825

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c pc programming 2 - 801 programming screen help text: system data help text y y help in webpro is more simplified than in pcpro. Control hint text y y smart links y – webpro has more simplified links than pcpro. Smart labels y y webpro has more simplified lab...

  • Page 826

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 802 pc programming quicksearch y y webpro has a simplified search facility. It applies only to programs. Pcpro provides extensive searching on programs, wizards and ipk cross-referencing. Reports system data y – pcpro can generate various reports based o...

  • Page 827

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c pc programming 2 - 803 software updates firmware upload y – the kts cpu firmware can be upgraded via pcpro. Licensing / feature activation pcpro registration y – pcpro requires product registration. Kts feature activation y y licensed kts features can activa...

  • Page 828

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 804 pc programming this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 829: Power Failure Transfer

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c power failure transfer 2 - 805 power failure transfer description power failure transfer ensures that a customer has access to the central office network during a power outage. The co/pbx tip and ring are automatically transferred to the time and ring of a p...

  • Page 830

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 806 power failure transfer required component(s) sli(4)/(8)-u( ) etu related features none programming 14-02-09 analog trunk data setup – busy tone detection 0 = disable (default) 1 = enable (default: 0) 14-02-14 analog trunk data setup – loop start/grou...

  • Page 831: Prime Line Selection

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c prime line selection 2 - 807 prime line selection description prime line selection allows a multiline terminal user to place or answer a call over a specific trunk by lifting the handset. The user does not have to press a key or dial a code. This simplifies ...

  • Page 832

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 808 prime line selection system availability terminals any station required component(s) none related features central office calls, placing direct inward dialing (did) direct inward line (dil) direct inward system access (disa) line preference programmi...

  • Page 833

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c prime line selection 2 - 809 15-02-10 multiline telephone basic data setup – ringing line preference for trunk calls enter 1 if lifting the handset should answer ringing prime line; enter 0 to seize idle line appearance. (default: 1) 15-06-01 trunk access ma...

  • Page 834

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 810 prime line selection this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 835: Private Line

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c private line 2 - 811 private line description a private line is a trunk reserved for a multiline terminal for placing and answering calls. A user with a private line always knows when important calls are for them. Additionally, the user has their own trunk f...

  • Page 836

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 812 private line system availability terminals al stations required component(s) none related features call forwarding central office calls, placing do not disturb line preference prime line selection programmable function keys single line telephones, an...

  • Page 837

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c private line 2 - 813 14-01-09 basic trunk data setup – private line determine if a trunk should be used as a normal (0) or private (1) line. (default: 0) 15-06-01 trunk access map for extensions assign extension to have private line to an unused private line...

  • Page 838

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 814 private line to place a call from your multiline terminal on you private line: 1. Press the private line key, then press speaker or lift the handset. 2. Dial the number. To answer a call from your multiline terminal on your private line: 1. Press pri...

  • Page 839: Programmable Function Keys

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c programmable function keys 2 - 815 programmable function keys description each multiline terminal has programmable function keys. Programmable function keys simplify placing calls, answering calls and using certain features. You can customize the function of...

  • Page 840

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 816 programmable function keys if the feature key is not listed below, the lcd shows all-blank. (prg 15-07-01 line key assign). One-touch keys programmed for park hold service code cannot be used to park calls without first using hold or transfer. Pauses...

  • Page 841

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c programmable function keys 2 - 817 system availability terminals all multiline terminals required component(s) d16(ld)-r adm related features direct station selection one-touch calling speed dial – system/group/station programming 15-07-01 programmable funct...

  • Page 842

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 818 programmable function keys operation to change a 2-digit programmable key: 1. Press speaker. 2. Dial 751 for 2-digit codes. 3. Press the key you want to program. 4. Enter the 2-digit key function, any additional information needed for the key and pre...

  • Page 843

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c programming from a multiline terminal 2 - 819 programming from a multiline terminal description system programming can be performed from any display multiline terminal. Most programming changes become effective immediately. Other programming changes become e...

  • Page 844

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 820 programming from a multiline terminal after setting a number of days in the program, subsequent days show one less as it counts down to expiration. When prg 90-37-01 shows 1, the license expires at midnight on that day. When the license expires, the ...

  • Page 845

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c programming from a multiline terminal 2 - 821 programming 90-02 programming password setup 90-37 temporary license operation refer to the electra elite ipk ii programming manual for additional information..

  • Page 846

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 822 programming from a multiline terminal this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 847: Pulse to Tone Conversion

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c pulse to tone conversion 2 - 823 pulse to tone conversion description an extension can use pulse to tone conversion on trunk calls. Pulse to tone conversion lets a user change their extension dialing mode while placing a call. For systems in a dial pulse are...

  • Page 848

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 824 pulse to tone conversion required component(s) coi(4/8)-u10 etu, coid(4/8)-u10 etu, coib(4/8)-u( ) etu - or - tli(2)-u( ) etu - or - dti-u( ) etu assigned for co or tie line mode related features central office calls, placing multiple trunk types pro...

  • Page 849: Quick Transfer to Voice Mail

    Quick transfer to voice mail 2 - 825 q quick transfer to voice mail description a station user transferring a call can transfer the call to the called party voice mail box after an internal station number is dialed while performing a screened transfer, or during intercom calls. Conditions the quick ...

  • Page 850

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 826 quick transfer to voice mail default setting not enabled system availability terminals all terminals required component(s) any supported voice mail related features digital voice mail ipk ii in-mail voice mail integration (analog) programming 45-01-0...

  • Page 851

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c quick transfer to voice mail 2 - 827 operation to quick transfer a call while talking with an outside or internal party: 1. Press transfer, and wait for an internal dial tone. 2. Enter a station number, and wait for a ringback tone. 3. Dial the quick transfe...

  • Page 852

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 828 quick transfer to voice mail this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 853: Redial Key

    Redial key 2 - 829 r redial key description users can press the redial key to cycle through the last 10 outside numbers dialed. Press the # key to redial the number displayed. Users can also press the redial key and dial a system speed dial bin number to access system speed dial. Conditions redial l...

  • Page 854

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 830 redial key programming none operation to redial the last number dialed: 1. Press redial. Redial [#] sys is displayed along with the last dialed number. 2. Dial the # key. To scroll through the last 10 outside numbers dialed: 1. Press redial. Each tim...

  • Page 855: Remote (System) Upgrade

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c remote (system) upgrade 2 - 831 remote (system) upgrade description with pc programming, the electra elite ipk ii can be remotely upgraded to a newer version of main system software. When a new version of main system software is released, a firmware package ...

  • Page 856

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 832 remote (system) upgrade default setting at default, both pcpro and webpro are set to update immediately after the upload. System availability terminals not applicable required component(s) pcpro or webpro related features pc programming programming r...

  • Page 857

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c remote (system) upgrade 2 - 833 6. Select the schedule type: immediately after upload at the time… if you choose at the time…, select the date and time you want the cpuii to reset and switch over to the new software version. 7. Click start. Pcpro uploads the...

  • Page 858

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 834 remote (system) upgrade this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 859: Repeat Redial

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c repeat redial 2 - 835 repeat redial description if a multiline terminal user places a trunk call that is busy or unanswered, they can have repeat redial try it again later on. The user does not continually have to try the number again – hoping it goes throug...

  • Page 860

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 836 repeat redial related features automatic route selection central office calls, placing last number redial save number dialed single line telephones, analog 500/2500 sets programming 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign a function key for repeat...

  • Page 861

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c repeat redial 2 - 837 operation to use repeat redial (if the outside party you call is unavailable or busy): 1. Place a trunk call. Listen for busy tone or ring no answer. 2. Press feature + redial. - or - press the repeat redial key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 29...

  • Page 862

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 838 repeat redial this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 863: Resident System Program

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c resident system program 2 - 839 resident system program description when power is supplied to the system, the hardware configuration is scanned and resident system program default values are assigned including terminal types (e.G. Pgd(2)-u10 adp, dss console...

  • Page 864

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 840 resident system program related features none programming 14-02-09 analog trunk data setup – busy tone detection 0 = disable (default) 1 = enable 14-02-14 analog trunk data setup – loop start/ground start 0 = loop start (default) 1 = ground start ope...

  • Page 865: Reverse Voice Over

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c reverse voice over 2 - 841 reverse voice over description while on a call, reverse voice over lets a busy multiline terminal user make a private intercom call to an idle co-worker. The idle co-worker can be at a multiline terminal or single line telephone. T...

  • Page 866

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 842 reverse voice over reverse voice over is not available from single line telephones, but a single line telephone can be a reverse voice over destination. If an extension user places a reverse voice over to a busy destination extension, the system sets...

  • Page 867

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c reverse voice over 2 - 843 voice over programming 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign a function key for reverse voice over (code 47 + destination extension). Assign a function key for voice over to the destination extension (code 48). This allows the...

  • Page 868

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 844 reverse voice over when the telephone is idle: to place a call to your reverse voice over destination: 1. Press your reverse voice over key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 47 + destination extension). You can optionally lift the handset after this step for pri...

  • Page 869: Ring Groups

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ring groups 2 - 845 ring groups description ring groups determine how trunks ring extensions. Generally, trunks ring extensions only if ring group programming allows. For example, to make a trunk ring an extension: assign the trunk and the extension to the s...

  • Page 870

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 846 ring groups system availability terminals all multiline terminals and single line telephones required component(s) none related features automatic call distribution (acd) automatic route selection direct inward line (dil) direct inward dialing (did) ...

  • Page 871

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ring groups 2 - 847 22-02-01 incoming call trunk setup assign the incoming trunk type (0) for each trunk. There is one item for each night service mode. This option must be set to 0 for ring groups to work. Night service time mode: 1~8 22-04-01 incoming exte...

  • Page 872

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 848 ring groups use the charts below to program the following example: operation refer to central office calls, answering on page 2-187 . For this extension . . . 1 301 trunk 1 rings trunk 2 flashes trunk 3 flashes 302 trunk 1 flashes trunk 2 rings trunk...

  • Page 873

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ringdown extension, internal/external 2 - 849 ringdown extension, internal/external description with a ringdown extension, a user can call another extension, outside number, or speed dialing number by just lifting the handset. The call automatically goes thr...

  • Page 874

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 850 ringdown extension, internal/external the @ code is used to make an outbound call automatically forward to a disa trunk or to vm auto attendant. This code can be used only on isdn outbound calls. Internal calls and analog outbound calls are not suppo...

  • Page 875

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c ringdown extension, internal/external 2 - 851 programming 20-06-01 class of service for extensions assign a class of service (1~15) to an extension. 20-08-09 class of service options (outgoing call service) – hotline/extension ringdown enable (1)/disable (0)...

  • Page 876

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 852 ringdown extension, internal/external this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 877: Room Monitor

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c room monitor 2 - 853 room monitor description room monitor lets an extension user listen to the sounds in a co-workers area. For example, the receptionist could listen for sounds in the warehouse when it is left unattended. To use room monitor, the initiatin...

  • Page 878

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 854 room monitor call arrival (car) key (virtual extension) keys do not support room monitor programmable function keys (code 39). Room monitor for single line telephones can be used with the hotel/motel feature. For a multiline terminal, room monitor re...

  • Page 879

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c room monitor 2 - 855 programming multiline room monitoring start should a multiline terminal user be able to initiate room monitor? In program 20-13-11, enter 0. In program 20-06-01, assign class of service to extensions. In program 15-07-01, assign a room m...

  • Page 880

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 856 room monitor single line telephone room monitoring start should a single line telephone user be able to initiate and receive room monitor? In program 42-03-12, enter 0. In program 20-06-01, assign class of service to extensions. In program 11-14-17, ...

  • Page 881

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c room monitor 2 - 857 programming 11-14-17 service code setup (for hotel) – hotel room monitor customize the service code (675 by default) to be used for room monitor. 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign a function key as a room monitor key (code 39) f...

  • Page 882

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 858 room monitor to cancel room monitor (at either extension): 1. Press the room monitor key at both the initiating extension and the monitored extension. Single line telephones: to activate room monitor (at the extension to be monitored): 1. Lift the ha...

  • Page 883: Save Number Dialed

    Save number dialed 2 - 859 s save number dialed description save number dialed allows an extension user to save their last outside number dialed and easily redial it later on. For example, an extension user can recall a busy or unanswered number without manually dialing the digits. The system retain...

  • Page 884

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 860 save number dialed related features automatic route selection central office calls, placing dial tone detection last number redial programmable function keys repeat redial programming 11-12-13 service code setup (for service access) – saved number di...

  • Page 885

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c save number dialed 2 - 861 to redial a saved number: multiline terminal 1. Press an idle trunk line key. This selects a specific trunk for the call. 2. Press the save number dialed key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 30). The stored number dials out. - or - 1. Press s...

  • Page 886

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 862 save number dialed single line telephone 1. Lift the handset and dial 785. 2. Hang up..

  • Page 887: Secondary Incoming Extension

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c secondary incoming extension 2 - 863 secondary incoming extension description secondary incoming extensions (sie) are incoming appearance keys of actual stations assigned in the system. Sie keys are assigned to programmable function keys and can appear on an...

  • Page 888

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 864 secondary incoming extension system availability terminals all multiline terminals required component(s) none related features call queuing call appearance (cap) keys call arrival (car) keys virtual extensions programming 11-04-01 virtual extension n...

  • Page 889

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c secondary incoming extension 2 - 865 15-07-01 programmable function keys kyxx = key number 01~32 ky01 = 03 (virtual extension, 01 by default) ky01 = 08 (cap key) 15-08-01 incoming virtual extension ring tone setup icm tone pattern: 0 = pattern 1 (default) 1 ...

  • Page 890

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 866 secondary incoming extension 21-01-15 system options for outgoing calls – outgoing disable on incoming line (toll restriction) 0 = off (default) 1 = on 23-04-01 ringing line preference for virtual extensions order 1 stg group = 0~64 (0 by default) or...

  • Page 891: Secretary Call (Buzzer)

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c secretary call (buzzer) 2 - 867 secretary call (buzzer) description secretary call lets two co-workers alert each other without disturbing their work. To have secretary call, both co-workers must have multiline terminals with secretary call buzzer keys. When...

  • Page 892

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 868 secretary call (buzzer) required component(s) none related features programmable function keys programming 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign function keys for secretary call buzzer (code 41 + the destination extension number). Both co-worker...

  • Page 893

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c secretary call (buzzer) 2 - 869 to cancel a secretary call left at your extension: 1. Do not lift the handset. 2. Press the flashing secretary call key..

  • Page 894

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 870 secretary call (buzzer) this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 895: Secretary Call Pickup

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c secretary call pickup 2 - 871 secretary call pickup description secretary call pickup lets a multiline terminal user easily reroute calls intended for a co-worker to themselves. By pressing a secretary call pickup key, the user can have all calls to a co-wor...

  • Page 896

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 872 secretary call pickup related features call forwarding with follow me programmable function keys secretary call (buzzer) single line telephones, analog 500/2500 sets programming 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign function keys for secretary c...

  • Page 897: Selectable Display Messaging

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c selectable display messaging 2 - 873 selectable display messaging description an extension user can select a programmed selectable display message for their extension. Display multiline terminal callers see the selected message when they call the user’s exte...

  • Page 898

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 874 selectable display messaging conditions the # cannot be used in a message. When selectable display messaging is set as dnd all, all other dnd modes are canceled when selectable display messaging is canceled. Default setting enabled system availabilit...

  • Page 899

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c selectable display messaging 2 - 875 20-01-02 system options – text message mode select whether and intercom caller should hear busy (1) or ring through (0) for extensions which have selectable display messaging set. Any extension previously set with selecta...

  • Page 900

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 876 selectable display messaging operation to select a message: 1. Press speaker + press the text message key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 18) + enter digits to append (if needed) + speaker to hang up. Skip the remaining steps. 2. (optional for messages 1~8 and...

  • Page 901: Selectable Ring Tones

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c selectable ring tones 2 - 877 selectable ring tones description an extension user can change the way trunks or internal calls ring their telephone. Selectable ring tones allow an extension user to set up unique ringing for their calls. This is important in a...

  • Page 902

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 878 selectable ring tones programming 11-11-20 service code setup (for setup/entry operation) – change incoming co and icm ring tones if required, change the service code used for changing the incoming ring tones heard for co and icm calls (default: 720)...

  • Page 903

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c selectable ring tones 2 - 879 22-03-01 trunk ring tone range select the ring tone range for the trunk. The trunk uses a ring tone in the range selected when it rings an extension. Four ring tones are available. (default: 0) operation to change your extension...

  • Page 904

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 880 selectable ring tones this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 905: Serial Call

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c serial call 2 - 881 serial call description serial call is a method of transferring a call so it automatically returns to the transferring extension. Serial calling saves transferring steps between users. For example, a customer service representative (csr) ...

  • Page 906

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 882 serial call related features programmable function keys transfer programming 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign a programmable key as a serial call key (code 43). Operation to place a serial call to a co-worker: 1. Place or answer a call. 2. ...

  • Page 907

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c single line telephones, analog 500/2500 sets 2 - 883 single line telephones, analog 500/2500 sets description the system is compatible with 500 type (dial pulse) and 2500 type (dtmf) analog single line telephones (slts). You can install single line telephone...

  • Page 908

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 884 single line telephones, analog 500/2500 sets with version 2000 or higher, when a ring group call rings a single line station, the blf indication shows busy. Stutter dial tone is supported to single line telephones for voice mail message waiting. Defa...

  • Page 909

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c single line telephones, analog 500/2500 sets 2 - 885 related features single line telephone users have access to the following features: data communications apa and apr modules can be used with multiline terminals to provide an analog port. Refer to the indi...

  • Page 910

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 886 single line telephones, analog 500/2500 sets 15-03-01 single line telephone basic data setup – slt signaling type enter 0 if single line telephone is a 500 type (dial pulse). Enter 1 if single line telephone is a 2500 type (dtmf). (default: 1) 15-03-...

  • Page 911

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c single line telephones, analog 500/2500 sets 2 - 887 82-11-01 sli initial setup – bounce protect time 82-11-02 sli initial setup – hookflash start time 82-11-03 sli initial setup – hookflash end time define various timers for the sli etus. The entries you ma...

  • Page 912

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 888 single line telephones, analog 500/2500 sets this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 913: Slt Adapter

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c slt adapter 2 - 889 slt adapter description the slt (single line telephone) adapter allows a port of an esib(8)-u( ) etu or esie(8)-u( ) etu to support a single line telephone. A single line telephone can be connected to the esib(8)-u( ) etu using the slt ad...

  • Page 914

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 890 slt adapter cordless telephone connection single line telephones, analog 500/2500 sets programming 10-03-01 etu setup – terminal type (b1) for esi pkg 11-02 extension numbering 20-07 class of service options (administrator level) refer to table 2-6 c...

  • Page 915

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c slt adapter 2 - 891 to originate outside calls: 1. Lift the handset, and wait for dial tone. 2. Dial trunk access code (default: 9). 3. Dial the number of outside party. 4. Talk when the called party answers. To answer outside or internal calls: lift the han...

  • Page 916

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 892 slt adapter this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 917

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c snmp simple network management protocol 2 - 893 snmp simple network management protocol description simple network management protocol (snmp) is an application-layer protocol designed to facilitate the exchange of management information between devices which...

  • Page 918

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 894 snmp simple network management protocol conditions the snmp software module (agent) located on the elite ipk ii cpuii supports remote monitoring and debugging of elite ipk ii system by using the snmp command set. Snmp agent uses port 161 for communic...

  • Page 919

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c snmp simple network management protocol 2 - 895 system availability terminals none required component(s) ipk ii cpuii( )-u10 etu release 2.00 or higher. Snmp manager which supports snmp v1, v2 and v3 with md5 authentication. Related features none programming...

  • Page 920

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 896 snmp simple network management protocol 10-43-06 snmp setting – read write community name (version 1600 or higher required) define the read and write community name. (default: necprivate) 10-43-07 snmp setting – snmpv3 authentication method (version ...

  • Page 921: Softkeys

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c softkeys 2 - 897 softkeys description each display telephone provides interactive softkeys for intuitive feature access. It is no longer necessary to remember feature codes to access the telephone advanced features because the function of the softkeys change...

  • Page 922

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 898 softkeys required component(s) none related features directory dialing volume controls programming none.

  • Page 923

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c speed dial – system/group/station 2 - 899 speed dial – system/group/station description speed dialing gives an extension user quick access to frequently called numbers. This saves time, for example, when calling a client with whom they deal often. Instead of...

  • Page 924

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 900 speed dial – system/group/station storing a flash to enhance compatibility with connected centrex and pbx lines, speed dialing bin can have a stored flash command. For example, storing 9 flash 926 5400 causes the system to dial 9, flash the line and ...

  • Page 925

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c speed dial – system/group/station 2 - 901 system availability terminals all terminals required component(s) none related features account code entry automatic route selection central office calls, placing code restriction dial tone detection one-touch callin...

  • Page 926

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 902 speed dial – system/group/station 13-01-01 speed dialing option setup – speed dialing auto outgoing call mode designate trunk or intercom outgoing mode. (default: 0, trunk) 13-01-03 speed dialing option setup – number of common speed dialing bins des...

  • Page 927

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c speed dial – system/group/station 2 - 903 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign a function key for system speed dialing (27) or group speed dialing (28). You can program the key as either a general speed dialing key or you can choose to store a bin numb...

  • Page 928

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 904 speed dial – system/group/station operation to store an speed dialing number (display telephones only): 1. Press speaker. 2. Dial 753 (for system) or 754 (for group). 3. Dial system or group storage code. Initially, there are 1000 system speed dialin...

  • Page 929

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c speed dial – system/group/station 2 - 905 7. Press hold. 8. Press speaker to hang up or repeat steps 3~7 to program another system or group speed dial bin. To dial a system speed dialing number: 1. Go off-hook. 2. Press redial. 3. Dial the system speed diali...

  • Page 930

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 906 speed dial – system/group/station to dial a group speed dialing number: 1. Go off-hook. 2. Press redial. - or - 3. Press the group speed dialing key (prg 15-07-01 or sc 751: 28). To preselect, press a line key in step 1 (instead of speaker) before pr...

  • Page 931

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c speed dial – system/group/station 2 - 907 6. Enter the name associated with the speed dialing number (display telephones only). 7. Press hold. 8. Press speaker to hang up. To dial a station speed dialing number: 1. Press speaker. 2. Dial # 7 (default service...

  • Page 932

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 908 speed dial – system/group/station 1 = station speed dial buffer 1 2 = station speed dial buffer 2 : : : : : : : 0 = station speed dial buffer 10 the stored number dials out. Unless you preselect, trunk group routing selects the trunk for the call. Th...

  • Page 933: Station Add-On Console

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c station add-on console 2 - 909 station add-on console description the station add-on console functions with a multiline terminal to provide an additional 16 dss/blf keys. The busy lamp field status is shown by icons for each station or feature. This console ...

  • Page 934

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 910 station add-on console dtr/dth-16-2 dtr/dth-16ld-2 required component(s) d16(ld)-r( ) adm related features one-touch calling programmable function keys programming 11-11-17 service code setup (for setup/entry operation) – programmable function key pr...

  • Page 935: Station Hunt

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c station hunt 2 - 911 station hunt description after calling a busy extension, a call immediately hunts to the next available member of the hunt group (department group). The caller does not have to hang up and place another intercom call if the first extensi...

  • Page 936

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 912 station hunt programming 16-01-03 department group basic data setup – department routing when busy (auto step call) assign if a call to busy hunts (1) or does not hunt (0) to the next available member of the hunt group (department group). (default: 0...

  • Page 937

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c station message detail recording 2 - 913 station message detail recording description station message detail recording (smdr) provides a record of the system trunk calls. Typically, the record outputs to a customer-provided printer, terminal or smdr data col...

  • Page 938

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 914 station message detail recording duration monitoring smdr can include calls of any duration, or only those that last longer than the interval you specify. If you want to keep track of all trunk activity, use a short duration. To keep track of only si...

  • Page 939

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c station message detail recording 2 - 915 smdr enhanced for caller id the smdr output is enhanced to include up to 16 or 24 characters of the caller id name information (depending on the view option selected in program 35-02-18). You can select to display the...

  • Page 940

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 916 station message detail recording the following tables are displayed in the smdr output with these priorities: prg 35-02-14 data enable (1 st priority) pin 10:53 12/09 022 2142623801 no answer prg 35-02-16 received dial number enable (2 nd priority) p...

  • Page 941

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c station message detail recording 2 - 917 table 2-35 smdr report format with program 35-02-14 set to 0 character position field definition header line 1 1~60 spaces 61~70 mm/dd/yyyy 71 space 72~75 page 76 space 77~79 report page number (e.G., 001) cr & lf car...

  • Page 942

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 918 station message detail recording 5 space 6~10 time in 24 hour clock (hh:mm) 11 space 12~21 line 22 space 23~30 call duration (hh:mm:ss) 31 space 32~41 station number or name 42 space 43~62 number dialed (20 digits maximum) 63 space 64~79 account numb...

  • Page 943

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c station message detail recording 2 - 919 12~15 date 16~17 spaces 18~21 line 22 space 23~30 duration 31~32 spaces 33~39 station 40~44 spaces 45~51 dialled 52 space 53~59 no./cli 60~63 spaces 64~70 account cr & lf carriage return and line feed lf line feed smd...

  • Page 944

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 920 station message detail recording conditions smdr data does not include intercom calls. The smdr call buffer stores 500 calls. The buffer stores calls when the smdr device is unavailable. When the buffer fills, the oldest record is deleted to allow th...

  • Page 945

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c station message detail recording 2 - 921 smdr requires a connection to the cpuii via a com port, cta/ctu or lan connection. The system can also use a connection to the system via a cta/ctu adapter (the ctu adapter also requires a usb driver). Once you design...

  • Page 946

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 922 station message detail recording related features pbx compatibility traffic reports programming smdr flowcharts are located on the following pages..

  • Page 947

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c station message detail recording 2 - 923 smdr with a cpu connection (serial/cta/ctu/ethernet).

  • Page 948

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 924 station message detail recording smdr with a cpu connection (serial/cta/ctu/ethernet) (continued).

  • Page 949

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c station message detail recording 2 - 925 smdr with a cpu connection (serial/cta/ctu/ethernet) (continued).

  • Page 950

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 926 station message detail recording 10-20-01 lan setup for external equipment – tcp port define the tcp port (0~65535) when communicating to the smdr (type 5). (default: 0) 10-20-03 lan setup for external equipment – keep alive time set keep alive time ...

  • Page 951

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c station message detail recording 2 - 927 35-01-03 smdr options – header language specify the language in which the smdr header should be printed. Languages: 0 = english (default) 1 = german 2 = french 3 = italian 4 = spanish 35-01-04 smdr options – omit digi...

  • Page 952

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 928 station message detail recording 35-02-03 smdr output options – trunk number or name select whether the system should display the trunk name (0) or the number (1) on smdr reports (default: 1) if this option is set to 0, program 35-02-14 must be set t...

  • Page 953

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c station message detail recording 2 - 929 35-02-14 smdr output options – date determine whether the date should be displayed on smdr reports. 0 = not displayed 1 = displayed (default: 0) this option must be set to 0 if the trunk name is set to be displayed in...

  • Page 954

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 930 station message detail recording 80-05-01 date format for smdr and system – date format set the date format for smdr. 0 = american (default) 1 = japanese 2 = european operation once installed and programmed, smdr operation is automatic..

  • Page 955

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c station name assignment – user programmable 2 - 931 station name assignment – user programmable description this feature allows a user to program the station name for their telephone extension or any extension within the system. The name is displayed on the ...

  • Page 956

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 932 station name assignment – user programmable programming 15-01-01 basic extension data setup – extension name program name for system extensions. 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign an extension name change key (55) to extensions. 20-06-01 clas...

  • Page 958

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 934 station name assignment – user programmable this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 959: Station Relocation

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c station relocation 2 - 935 station relocation description station relocation allows a station to be moved from one location to another, without having to reprogram the station data. The stations features and extension number are the same after it is moved to...

  • Page 960

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 936 station relocation system availability terminals all multiline terminals and single line telephones required component(s) none related features none programming 11-15-12 service code setup, administrative (for special access – extension data swap ext...

  • Page 961

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c station relocation 2 - 937 prg 15-08 incoming virtual extension ring tone setup prg 15-09 virtual extension ring assignment prg 15-10 incoming virtual extension ring tone order setup prg 15-11 virtual extension delayed ring assignment prg 15-12 conversation ...

  • Page 962

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 938 station relocation operation to exchange two terminals: 1. Pick up the handset or press speaker. 2. Dial the extension data swap service code – not assigned at default (prg 11-15-12). 3. Dial the extension data swap password – not assigned at default...

  • Page 963: Synchronous Ringing

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c synchronous ringing 2 - 939 synchronous ringing description synchronous ringing synchronizes co/pbx incoming ringing with the incoming ringing pattern from a central office. Conditions when the multiline terminal is ringing at secondary extension (se)/virtua...

  • Page 964

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 940 synchronous ringing programming 14-02-17 analog trunk data setup – sync. Ringing enable/disable per trunk. 0 = disable 1 = enable (default) 20-15-01 through 20-15-11 ring cycle setup define the ringing cycles for each ring tone, when synchronous ring...

  • Page 965

    T1 trunking (with ani/dnis compatibility) 2 - 941 t t1 trunking (with ani/dnis compatibility) description the t1/pri interface etu gives the system t1 trunking ability. This etu uses a single universal slot and provides up to 24 trunk circuits. In additional to providing digital-quality trunking, th...

  • Page 966

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 942 t1 trunking (with ani/dnis compatibility) ani/dnis compatibility the system is compatible with telco t1 automatic number identification (ani) and dialed number information service (dnis) services. A compliment to caller id service, ani/dnis compatibi...

  • Page 967

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c t1 trunking (with ani/dnis compatibility) 2 - 943 the t1/pri interface etu provides tie line service. All programming parameters are the same as those used for analog tie lines (except for the additional t1/pri interface etu settings). Dti-u40 etus can be in...

  • Page 968

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 944 t1 trunking (with ani/dnis compatibility) system availability terminals all stations required component(s) dti-u40 etu with firmware v5.00 or higher locally provided csu/dsu required software version 1100 or higher related features caller id central ...

  • Page 969

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c t1 trunking (with ani/dnis compatibility) 2 - 945 programming 10-03-01 etu setup (version 1500 or higher required) set various t1 trunk options for compatibility with the local telco. For ani/dnis, the following settings in program 10-03 are recommended: ite...

  • Page 970

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 946 t1 trunking (with ani/dnis compatibility) 14-05-01 trunk group – trunk group number for ani/dnis, place all your ani/dnis trunks in trunk groups as required. (default: trunk ports 1~200 to group 1 and priority 1~200) 20-06-01 class of service for ext...

  • Page 971

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c t1 trunking (with ani/dnis compatibility) 2 - 947 34-02-01 e&m tie line class of service assign a class of service (1~15) to a tie line. The class of service options are defined in program 20-14. For each tie line, you make a separate entry for each night se...

  • Page 972

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 948 t1 trunking (with ani/dnis compatibility) 34-09-07 ani/dnis service options – routing on ani/dnis error determine how the system handles an ani/dnis call if a data error is detected in the incoming data string (0 = play busy tone to caller, 1 = route...

  • Page 973: Tandem Ringing

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c tandem ringing 2 - 949 tandem ringing description tandem ringing allows an extension user to have two telephones with one telephone number. For example, extension 105 (the master telephone) sets tandem ringing with extension 106. When extension 105 receives ...

  • Page 974

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 950 tandem ringing default setting disabled system availability terminals master telephone: multiline terminals or single line telephones slave telephone: single line telephones or wireless – dect handsets required component(s) id using wireless – dect h...

  • Page 975

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c tandem ringing 2 - 951 programming 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign a function key for tandem ringing (code 80). 30-03-01 dss console key assignment assign a dss function key for tandem ringing (code 80). 11-11-41 service code setup (for setup/entr...

  • Page 976

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 952 tandem ringing this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 977

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) 2 - 953 tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) description tandem trunking allows an extension user to join two outside callers in a trunk-to-trunk conference. The extension user can then drop out of the call, lea...

  • Page 978

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 954 tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) method d - automatic tandem trunking setup to speed dial number this method allows an extension user to easily set up an unsupervised conference with a call they have placed on hold. A class of service option...

  • Page 979

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) 2 - 955 with an analog trunk, the continue/disconnect code may work using dtmf sounds from the opposite side trunk. With an isdn trunk, program 14-01-25 must be enabled to detect the continue/disconnect code. The con...

  • Page 980

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 956 tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) required component(s) none related features call forwarding, off-premise central office calls, answering central office calls, placing direct inward system access (disa) programming tandem trunking method a –...

  • Page 981

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) 2 - 957 20-11-21 class of service options (hold/transfer service) – restriction for tandem trunking on hang up deny (1) an extension user ability to set up a tandem call automatically when they hang up. (default: 0) ...

  • Page 982

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 958 tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) 20-06-01 class of service for extensions assign a class of service (1~15) to an extension. 20-07-11 class of service options (administrator level) – forced trunk disconnect (analog trunk only) enter 1 to enab...

  • Page 983

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) 2 - 959 20-06-01 class of service for extensions assign a class of service (1~15) to an extension. 20-07-11 class of service options (administrator level) – forced trunk disconnect (analog trunk only) enter 1 to enab...

  • Page 984

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 960 tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) 11-10-08 service code setup (for system administrator) – setting the destination for automatic trunk transfer if the default service code (735) for setting the destination of the automatic tandem trunking fea...

  • Page 985

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) 2 - 961 24-04-01 automatic trunk-to-trunk transfer target setup assign the speed dialing number (0~1999) to be used as the destination for the trunk-to-trunk transfer. Trunks: 1~200 (default: 1999) 25-07-07 system ti...

  • Page 986

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 962 tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) 24-02-10 system options for transfer – disconnect trunk-to-trunk determine the time a conversation continues (0~64800 seconds) after the timer in program 24-02-07 expires. If this option is set to 0, the conv...

  • Page 987

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) 2 - 963 to end the tandem call: 1. Press either flashing line key. The line keys light steadily (green). You can listen (i.E., monitor) to the call or rejoin the conversation, based on the setting in program 20-13-10...

  • Page 988

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 964 tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) 2. Press hold to place the first trunk call on hold. 3. Place a second trunk call. 4. Hang up. This sets up an unsupervised conference with both outside parties. The line keys for the trunks light solid red. ...

  • Page 989

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) 2 - 965 to set and change the destination of the automatic tandem trunk call: 1. Dial service code 735 (or the service code set for set destination for automatic trunk-to-trunk transfer). 2. Dial the desired trunk nu...

  • Page 990

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 966 tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) continue/disconnect code to use the continue code to extend a tandem trunk call: 1. An external call connects to an external number either by transferring with tandem trunking or by disa caller. 2. After the ...

  • Page 991: Tapi Compatibility

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c tapi compatibility 2 - 967 tapi compatibility description the system has telephony applications programming interface (tapi) capability. Tapi capability provides: reduced tapi feature set (see the supported tapi commands chart below). Caller id data to the p...

  • Page 992

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 968 tapi compatibility default setting disabled system availability terminals electra elite ipk ii multiline terminal containing an rs-232-c cta unit/ctu unit with tapi compliant firmware linegetdevcaps linedevspecific linegetdevconfig linedial linegetic...

  • Page 993

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c tapi compatibility 2 - 969 required component(s) cpuii( )-u10 etu should have lan connection capability compatible system software version pc driver for the cta: pc running windows 2000 professional or higher pc driver for the ctu: pc running windows 2000 pr...

  • Page 994

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 970 tapi compatibility 2. Press the headset key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 05) twice. 3. Press the clear key to return the display to idle. The headset key blinks when automatic headset is activated. To cancel automatic headset, repeat these steps. 4. Press t...

  • Page 995: Tone Override

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c tone override 2 - 971 tone override description the multiline terminal user that calls a busy station and receives a call waiting tone can generate a tone override that is heard by the originator and busy station. The busy station user can place the existing...

  • Page 996

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 972 tone override programming 11-12-03 service code setup (for service access) – override (off-hook signaling) assign the service code used for off-hook signaling override. (default: 709) 11-16-04 single digit service code setup – intercom off-hook signa...

  • Page 997

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c tone override 2 - 973 20-18-06 service tone timers – interval of call waiting tone use this timer (0~64800 seconds) to set the time between off-hook signaling alerts. (default: 10) 80-01-02 service tone setup – basic tone number (default: 0). Refer to table ...

  • Page 998

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 974 tone override this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 999: Traffic Reports

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c traffic reports 2 - 975 traffic reports description the system provides the ability to send data to a pc connected to the electra elite ipk ii. The telephone call traffic data for each extension is captured for use with the station message detail recording (...

  • Page 1000

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 976 traffic reports system availability terminals all terminals required component(s) software licenses for smdr traffic total report – sample report terminal otg duration cost icm answer duration ringing abandon 301 54 01:45:14 720 326 115 02:11:52 00:0...

  • Page 1001

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c traffic reports 2 - 977 related features station message detail recording programming 90-20-01 traffic report data setup – call traffic output determine whether or not the call traffic output should be measured. 0 = no 1 = yes (default: 0) 90-20-03 traffic r...

  • Page 1002

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 978 traffic reports this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 1003: Transfer

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c transfer 2 - 979 transfer description transfer permits an extension user to send an active intercom or outside call to any other extension in the system. With transfer, any extension user can quickly send a call to the desired co-worker. A call a user transf...

  • Page 1004

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 980 transfer prevent recall of transferred call the class of service program allows you to prevent a transferred call from recalling the originating extension if the call is not answered. Transfer call into conference/existing call this feature allows ei...

  • Page 1005

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c transfer 2 - 981 conditions when an analog device is a member of a department group assigned as the vm department group in prg 45-01-01, it cannot perform an unsupervised transfer. When the party where the call is being transferred answers, the transferred p...

  • Page 1006

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 982 transfer if station a calls station b, and station a puts station b on hold and then calls station c, station c cannot transfer the call. Transferred calls to acd queue hear ringback and do not follow prg 24-02-02. Default setting enabled system avai...

  • Page 1007

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c transfer 2 - 983 related features barge-in call waiting/camp-on caller id call forwarding conference meet me paging transfer one-touch calling quick transfer to voice mail serial call programming 11-12-58 service code setup (for service access) – transfer in...

  • Page 1008

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 984 transfer 15-02-24 multiline telephone basic data setup – conference key mode program an extension conf key for conference or for transfer. When set for transfer (1), the user places a call on hold, dials the extension to which it should be transferre...

  • Page 1009

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c transfer 2 - 985 20-11-18 class of service options (hold/transfer service) – no recall allow (0)/deny (1) unanswered transferred calls to the cos from recalling the originating extension. (default: 0) for example, with this option set to 1 for cos 1, calls t...

  • Page 1010

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 986 transfer 20-18-07 service tone timers – intrusion tone repeat time after a user barges in, the system repeats the barge-in tone after this time (0~64800 seconds). Normally, you should disable this time by entering 0. (this timer also affects any othe...

  • Page 1011

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c transfer 2 - 987 25-06-02 vrs/disa one-digit code attendant setup – destination number define the destination number (up to 8 digits). (default: no setting) 31-05-01 universal night answer/ring over page for each trunk which should ring the external page, se...

  • Page 1012

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 988 transfer transferring without holding to transfer without holding (multiline terminal only): 1. Lift the handset. 2. Press busy line or press speaker. 3. When original caller hangs up, you are connected..

  • Page 1013

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c transfer 2 - 989 transferring intercom calls to transfer your intercom call: 1. At the multiline terminal, press hold. - or - at single line telephone, hookflash. 2. Dial extension to receive your call. If the extension is busy, does not answer or does not w...

  • Page 1014

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 990 transfer 3. Hang up. The call is transferred to the trunk’s ring group defined in program 22-05-01 and all assigned extensions in the group (program 22-04-01) ring or it rings the external paging, enabling anyone to answer the call. Transferring an i...

  • Page 1015: Trunk Group Routing

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c trunk group routing 2 - 991 trunk group routing description trunk group routing sets outbound call routing options for users that dial the trunk group routing code (9) for trunk calls. Trunk group routing routes calls in the order specified by system program...

  • Page 1016

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 992 trunk group routing system availability terminals all stations required component(s) none related features automatic route selection central office calls, placing direct inward dialing (did) dial tone detection multiple trunk types programmable funct...

  • Page 1017

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c trunk group routing 2 - 993 14-05-01 trunk group – trunk group number assign trunks to trunk groups. Trunk groups: 1~100 (default :all trunks assigned to trunk group 1) 14-06-01 trunk group routing – priority order number set up an outbound routing table for...

  • Page 1018

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 994 trunk group routing 25-10-01 trunk group routing for disa assign the trunk group route chosen when a user places a disa call into the system and dials 9. The trunk group routing is defined in program 14-06. If the system has ars, dialing 9 accesses a...

  • Page 1019: Trunk Groups

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c trunk groups 2 - 995 trunk groups description trunk groups let you optimize trunk usage for incoming and outgoing calls. Each group can be accessed by an access code plus the group number. There are 100 available trunk groups and you set the access order in ...

  • Page 1020

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 996 trunk groups system availability terminals all stations required component(s) none related features automatic route selection call appearance (cap) keys central office calls, placing dial tone detection direct inward dialing (did) programmable functi...

  • Page 1021

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c trunk groups 2 - 997 14-02-11 analog trunk data setup – next trunk in rotary if no dial tone enable (1)/disable (0) the system ability to skip over a trunk if dial tone is not detected. This pertains to calls using call appearance (cap) keys, speed dial, ars...

  • Page 1022

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 998 trunk groups 21-01-05 system options for outgoing calls – dial tone detection time if dial tone detection is enabled, the system waits this time (0~64800 seconds) for the telco to return dial tone. When the interval expires, the system assumes dial t...

  • Page 1023: Trunk Queuing/camp-On

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c trunk queuing/camp-on 2 - 999 trunk queuing/camp-on description trunk queuing permits an extension user to queue (wait in line) on-hook for a busy trunk or trunk group to become free. The system recalls the queued extension as soon as the trunk is available....

  • Page 1024

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1000 trunk queuing/camp-on central office calls, placing programmable function keys programming 15-07-01 programmable function keys assign a function key for trunk queuing and trunk camp-on (code 35). 20-01-08 system options – trunk queuing callback time...

  • Page 1025

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c trunk queuing/camp-on 2 - 1001 to cancel a trunk queueing/camp-on request: 1. At the multiline terminal, press idle speaker. - or - at the single line telephone, lift the handset. 2. Dial 770. 3. At the multiline terminal, press speaker to hang up. - or - at...

  • Page 1026

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1002 trunk queuing/camp-on this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 1027: Unified Messaging

    Unified messaging 2 - 1003 u unified messaging description the ctp( )-u10 and vmp-u40 based elitemail lx voice processing systems, using the electra elite ipk ii system and a local area network, provide unified messaging services for voice, fax and e-mail messages with access at either the desktop p...

  • Page 1028

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1004 unified messaging additional hospitality languages see multilingual support below for list of supported languages. The hospitality package supports one language at default. Upon purchasing hospitality: – on vmp-u40, three languages can be unlocked o...

  • Page 1029

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c unified messaging 2 - 1005 warning: voice messages forwarded to an e-mail address using e-mail integration are deleted from the user mailbox and the following features are not supported: pager notification, message waiting indication. The following e-mail pr...

  • Page 1030

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1006 unified messaging the following databases can be migrated to ctp and vmp based elitemail lx version 2.0.0.5 or higher: os/2 based elitemail cti dos based elitemail q51731 or higher linux based elitemail cti lx linux based elitemail cti lx lite the f...

  • Page 1031

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c unified messaging 2 - 1007 the os/2 based elitemail cti on the cti( )-u10 board does not support the following features when used in the ipk ii: caller id display via telephone. Caller id call return via telephone, viewmail, viewcall plus or viewmail for mic...

  • Page 1032

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1008 unified messaging maximum subscribers 256m cf = 200 512m cf = 250 2g cf = 350 4g cf = 400 4gb = 2000 6gb = 2000 4g cf = 400 approximate available recording time in hours 256m cf = 10 512m cf = 20 2g cf = 130 4g cf = 300 4g ssd= 300 6g ssd= 400 4g cf...

  • Page 1033

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c unified messaging 2 - 1009 stutter dial tone is supported to single line telephones for voice mail message waiting. Default settings not enabled system availability terminals: all terminals required component(s) elitemail lx on ctp( )-u10 etu: elitemail ctp(...

  • Page 1034

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1010 unified messaging required software: when using viewmail for microsoft messaging (vmm) with office xp/2002 or office 2000 you must have at least service pack 3 for office installed prior to installing vmm. Failure to do so requires removing and inst...

  • Page 1035

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c unified messaging 2 - 1011 programming 10-09-01 dtmf and dial tone circuit setup assign at least one circuit for dtmf reception (type 0 or 1). Use the following as a guide when allocating dtmf receivers: in light traffic sites, allocate one dtmf receiver for...

  • Page 1036

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1012 unified messaging extension. (optional) assign a voice mail record key to an extension (code 78). (optional) assign a personal answering machine emulation key (code 16). (optional) use a call redirect key (49) to allow a user to transfer a call to a...

  • Page 1037

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c unified messaging 2 - 1013 22-01-04 system options for incoming calls – dil no answer recall time a dil that rings its programmed destination longer than this time (0~64800 seconds) diverts to the dil no answer ring group set in program 22-08. (default: 0) i...

  • Page 1038

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1014 unified messaging 22-08-01 dil/irg no answer destination for voice mail overflow, enter the ring group that unanswered dils to voice mail ring after the dil call waiting time (program 22-01-04). (default: 1) 24-02-03 system options for transfer – de...

  • Page 1039

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c unified messaging 2 - 1015 45-01-18 voice mail integration options – trunk number mapping (version 2000 or higher required) set if the system sends two digit trunk numbers only or two or three digit trunk numbers to voice mail. (default: 2) 80-01-02 service ...

  • Page 1040

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1016 unified messaging 80-03-01 through 80-03-08 dtmf tone receiver setup 80-04-01 through 80-04-09 call progress tone detector setup set the criteria for dtmf dial, ringback and busy tones. Operation refer to digital voice mail on page 2-305 for complet...

  • Page 1041

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c uniform call distribution (ucd) 2 - 1017 uniform call distribution (ucd) description with uniform call distribution (ucd), an extension user can call an idle extension in a preprogrammed ucd group (department group – 64 department groups available) by dialin...

  • Page 1042

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1018 uniform call distribution (ucd) the vrs can also transfer calls to ucd (department) groups. Refer to the voice response system (vrs) on page 2-1089 feature for more information on setting up the vrs. The system prevents hunting to a ucd (department)...

  • Page 1043

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c uniform call distribution (ucd) 2 - 1019 priority routing figure 2-24 uniform call distribution (ucd) priority call routing priority 1 priority 2 priority 3 priority 1 priority 2 priority 3 priority 1 priority 2 priority 3 call call call telephone on a call ...

  • Page 1044

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1020 uniform call distribution (ucd) circular routing figure 2-25 uniform call distribution (ucd) circular routing call 1 call 2 call 3 call 4.

  • Page 1045

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c uniform call distribution (ucd) 2 - 1021 system availability terminals all stations required component(s) dspii-u10 unit and vrs compact flash (for delay announcements) related features automatic call distribution (acd) call forwarding call arrival (car) key...

  • Page 1046

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1022 uniform call distribution (ucd) 16-01-02 department group basic data setup – department calling cycle set the routing cycle for calls into a department (i.E., when a user dials the department pilot number). The system can ring the highest priority e...

  • Page 1047

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c uniform call distribution (ucd) 2 - 1023 20-13-06 class of service options (supplementary service) – automatic off-hook signaling (automatic override) allow (1)/deny (0) automatic off-hook signaling. Set to 0 when prg 16-01-03 is set to circular (hunt) (defa...

  • Page 1048

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1024 uniform call distribution (ucd) 2. Dial the ucd group (department) extension or pilot number. The system routes the call to the first free telephone in the (ucd group) department. To log out of your ucd (department calling) group: while you are logg...

  • Page 1049: Uniform Numbering Network

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c uniform numbering network 2 - 1025 uniform numbering network description uniform numbering network allows multiple or compatible systems to be connected in a network using tie lines. A station user can dial a system number and a station number (open numberin...

  • Page 1050

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1026 uniform numbering network default setting none system availability terminals all stations required component(s) tli(2)-u( ) etu or dti-u( ) etu related features automatic route selection flexible system numbering k-ccis – ip with iad k-ccis – ip wit...

  • Page 1051

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c uniform numbering network 2 - 1027 programming 11-01-01 system numbering set the systems internal (intercom) numbering plan. The numbering plan assigns the first and second digits dialed and affects the digits an extension user must dial to access other exte...

  • Page 1052

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1028 uniform numbering network 44-05-02 ars/f-route table – delete digits enter the number of digits to be deleted from the dialed number [0~255 (255 = delete all)]. (default: 0) 44-05-03 ars/f-route table – additional dial number table enter the table n...

  • Page 1053

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c uniform numbering network 2 - 1029 operation none.

  • Page 1054

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1030 uniform numbering network this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 1055: Universal Slots

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c universal slots 2 - 1031 universal slots description the ipk ii has eight universal slots, and up to three cabinets can be installed. The system uses the same ksu for the basic and expansion cabinets to support up to 24 universal slots. Conditions two softwa...

  • Page 1056

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1032 universal slots there are 32 common ports in the ipk ii that are shared by all three cabinets. Each universal slot is a 16-port slot. The basic port package does not limit the number of slots. It only limits the number of ports. The dti/pri etus can...

  • Page 1057

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c universal slots 2 - 1033 cnf(16)-u20 etu 16-port multimedia conference unit. This multiline conference bridge can support 8 or 16 ports. Each 8-port etu supports one 8-party conference or two 4-party conferences. Each 16-port etu supports one 16-party confer...

  • Page 1058

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1034 universal slots ctp( )-u( ) etu this etu is a multiplatform system that supports a maximum of 16 ports. It is a pc platform that contains data storage for voice recording and application software. A digital signal processor/voice processing section ...

  • Page 1059

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c universal slots 2 - 1035 esib(8)-u( ) etu with esie(8)-u( ) etu these etus are a 16-port electronic station interface. The esie etu is installed on esib etu. This electronic station interface etu contains eight circuits. Each circuit can support any attendan...

  • Page 1060

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1036 universal slots opx(2)-u( ) etu this 2-port off-premise extension interface etu provides termination and operation of two off-premise extensions. Each etu has a built-in ringer signal generator (rsg). Up to 1600 ohms of resistance (including the sin...

  • Page 1061

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c universal slots 2 - 1037 slib(4)-u( ) etu this 4-port single line interface etu supports four single line telephones. Each etu provides a built-in ringer signal generator (rsg) and message waiting (mw) led voltage to single line telephones. This etu is insta...

  • Page 1062

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1038 universal slots vms(8)-u( ) etu/ this 8-port digital voice mail system is installed in any interface slot. It has eight channels of built-in voice mail. The system recognizes this etu as a vms(8)-u( ) etu. This etu shares the total number of station...

  • Page 1063

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c universal slots 2 - 1039 table 2-42 maximum system capacities for trunk interface etus trunk interface etus description maximum capacities notes basic port package expanded port package brt(4)-u( ) etu this 4-port basic rate interface for eight trunks provid...

  • Page 1064

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1040 universal slots coib(4)-u( ) etu this 4-port co/pbx line interface can function the same as the coi(4) or coid(4) etu to provided a central office interface. When set for coid mode, loop start dtmf trunks and/or caller id trunks are supported, and t...

  • Page 1065

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c universal slots 2 - 1041 did(4)-u( ) etu this 4-port direct inward dialing interface supports four did or four two-way did lines. Each etu requires one interface slot in the ksu. Immediate, wink start, second dial tone, and delay dial signaling can be combin...

  • Page 1066

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1042 universal slots tli (2)-u( ) etu this 2-port tie line interface etu supports the termination and operation of two e&m tie lines (4-wire, type i and type v, and 10/20 pps dial pulse or dtmf). Immediate, wink start, second dial tone, and delay dial si...

  • Page 1067

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c universal slots 2 - 1043 bsu(2s)-u20 etu this slave 2-base station unit for wireless dect has connections for two base stations and must be used with the bsu(4m)-u20 etu. This etu is installed in the first or second slot to the left of the bsu(4)-u20 etu. 2 ...

  • Page 1068

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1044 universal slots refer to the ipk ii general description manual or system hardware manual for more information. Coi/coid card will show as coi in 10-03-01, but with show correct in 90-34-01. The following card calculator allows you to determine the m...

  • Page 1069

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c universal slots 2 - 1045 coi(8)-u10 etu 82 9 coid(8)-u( ) etu 55 9 coib(4)-u20 etu 29 5 coib(4)-u30 etu 29 5 coib(8)-u30 etu 54 9 did(4)-u( ) etu 24 30 dti-u10/20/30 etu 84 0 dti-u40 etu 73 0 iad(8) etu 31 110 tli(2)-u( ) etu 15 10 station cnf(16)-u20 etu 17...

  • Page 1070

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1046 universal slots default setting none vms(8)-u20 etu 99 101 cms(2)-u30 etu 55 68 cms(4)-u30 etu 55 68 fms(2)-u30 etu 55 68 fms(4)-u30 etu 55 68 fms(8)-u30 etu 81 68 vms(4)-u30 etu 55 96 vms(8)-u30 etu 80 100 vms(4)-u40 etu 55 96 vms(8)-u40 etu 80 100...

  • Page 1071

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c universal slots 2 - 1047 system availability terminals n/a required component(s) any etu related features none programming 10-03-01 etu setup setup and confirm the basic configuration data for each etu. 90-34-01 firmware information – pkg name 90-34-02 firmw...

  • Page 1072

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1048 universal slots this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 1073: User Programming Ability

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c user programming ability 2 - 1049 user programming ability description a station user can perform programming functions. Speed group dialing and function keys are just two features programmable from a station. Conditions multiline terminals must be idle, off...

  • Page 1074

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1050 user programming ability programming none operation none.

  • Page 1075: Virtual Extensions

    Virtual extensions 2 - 1051 v virtual extensions description virtual extensions are available software extensions on the basic and expanded port packages. A virtual extension assigned to a line key, can appear and ring on an individual station or multiple stations and be used for outbound access. Vi...

  • Page 1076

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1052 virtual extensions virtual extensions do not support the following features (version 1500 or lower): barge-in conference conference, voice call/privacy release reverse voice over tone override voice over when a valid system station calls a virtual e...

  • Page 1077

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c virtual extensions 2 - 1053 related features call queuing call arrival (car) keys secondary incoming extension programming 11-04-01 virtual extension numbering assign extension number for the virtual extensions (1~256). (default: 1~99 = 201~299, 100~256 = 33...

  • Page 1078

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1054 virtual extensions 15-10-01 virtual incoming extension ring tone order setup set the priority (1~4) for the virtual extensions’ ring tones set in program 15-08-01. When simultaneous virtual extension calls ring an extension, the tone with the highes...

  • Page 1079

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c virtual extensions 2 - 1055 23-04-01 ringing line preference for virtual extensions when an extension has a virtual extension on function key, this program determines the priority (1~4) for a ring group for automatically answering ringing calls when the hand...

  • Page 1080

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1056 virtual extensions 7. Dial the mode number in which the key rings. 1 = day 1 2 = night 1 3 = midnight 1 4 = rest 1 5 = day 2 6 = night 2 7 = midnight 2 8 = rest 2 8. Press hold for a second time for delayed ring, or skip to step 10. 9. Dial the mode...

  • Page 1081

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice mail integration (analog) 2 - 1057 voice mail integration (analog) description the system provides telephone users with comprehensive voice mail features. Voice mail ends the frustration and cost of missed calls, inaccurate written messages and telepho...

  • Page 1082

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1058 voice mail integration (analog) transferring to voice mail by using transfer to voice mail, a multiline terminal extension user can transfer a call to the user’s or a co-worker’s mailbox. After the transfer goes through, the caller can leave a messa...

  • Page 1083

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice mail integration (analog) 2 - 1059 use the chart below to determine what leading and trailing digits will be sent to the analog voice mail system. Program program 45-01-15 (0 = fixed) program 45-01-17 (1=yes or 0=no) program 45-01-15 (1 = program) prog...

  • Page 1084

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1060 voice mail integration (analog) =if leading digits are blanks, nothing will be sent to the analog vm as integration. Conditions when an analog device is a member of a department group assigned as the vm department group in prg 45-01-01, it cannot pe...

  • Page 1085

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice mail integration (analog) 2 - 1061 system availability terminals all stations required component(s) slib(4)-u10 etu slie(4)-u10 etu related features barge-in caller id direct inward line (dil) hold message waiting one-touch calling programmable functio...

  • Page 1086

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1062 voice mail integration (analog) 11-07-01 department group pilot numbers – dial assign a department group pilot number for the voice mail (eight digits maximum). The extensions are assigned to the group in program 16-02-01. (default: no setting) 11-1...

  • Page 1087

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice mail integration (analog) 2 - 1063 15-02-37 multiline telephone basic data setup – voice mail message wait lamp color (version 1600 or higher required) select the message waiting flash pattern for the station that set the message waiting reminder. 0 = ...

  • Page 1088

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1064 voice mail integration (analog) 20-03-01 system options for single line telephones – slt call waiting answer mode for a busy single line (500/2500 type) telephone, set the mode used to answer a camped-on trunk call. The default setting should be use...

  • Page 1089

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice mail integration (analog) 2 - 1065 24-02-02 system options for transfer – moh or ringback on transferred calls enable (0)/disable (1) moh on transfer. If enabled, a transferred caller hears music on hold while their call rings the destination extension...

  • Page 1090

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1066 voice mail integration (analog) 45-01-15 voice mail integration options – analog voice mail protocol selection (version 1500 or higher required) assign whether dtmf sent to the analog vm follows the fixed (0) or the programmed (1) leading digits. Pr...

  • Page 1091

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice mail integration (analog) 2 - 1067 operation calling your mailbox to call your mailbox: multiline terminal 1. Press your voice mail key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 77) or the message key. - or - press speaker and dial the voice mail master number. After voic...

  • Page 1092

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1068 voice mail integration (analog) checking messages 1. Press the message key once. The voice mail is called. When there are new messages, the large led on the telephone flashes as red. With this option set, the msg key can be used as a voice mail key ...

  • Page 1093

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice mail message indication on line keys 2 - 1069 voice mail message indication on line keys description voice mail message indication on line keys indicates a new voice mail message on line keys or dss/ blf keys. Conditions when a dss key of an installed ...

  • Page 1094

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1070 voice mail message indication on line keys related features class of service digital voice mail direct station selection (dss) console ipk ii in-mail programmable function keys voice mail integration (analog) programming 15-07-01 programmable functi...

  • Page 1095

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice mail message indication on line keys 2 - 1071 operation to program a dss/blf key on a telephone: 1. Press speaker. 2. Dial 751. 3. Press the key you want to program. 4. Dial 01. 5. Dial the number of the extension you want to appear on the key. 6. Pres...

  • Page 1096

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1072 voice mail message indication on line keys this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 1097: Voice Over

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice over 2 - 1073 voice over description voice over lets a user interrupt a busy station user that is on another call. With voice over, the busy extension user hears an alert tone followed by the voice of the interrupting party. The extension user receivin...

  • Page 1098

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1074 voice over when a programmable function key (programmed with the voice over access code) is pressed, the led lights while responding to the page. When a multiline terminal has a handsfree unit programmed, the voice over call can be received and answ...

  • Page 1099

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice over 2 - 1075 required component(s) none related features conference off-hook signaling programmable function keys programming 11-12-41 service code setup (for system access) – voice over the service code used for the voice over feature (default: 690)....

  • Page 1100

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1076 voice over operation to initiate a voice over to a busy extension: 1. Press voice over key (prg 15-07 or sc 751: 48) - or - dial 6. - or - dial 790. You hear an alert tone and the voice over key flashes. You can talk to the called party after the al...

  • Page 1101

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice over internet protocol (voip) 2 - 1077 voice over internet protocol (voip) description voip (voice over internet protocol) allows the delivery of voice information using the internet protocol (sending data over the internet using an ip address). This m...

  • Page 1102

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1078 voice over internet protocol (voip) to connect a telephone to a lan connection, the system allows using an electra elite ipk ii digital ip 16-button multiline terminal (called an electra elite ipk ii ip phone), an electra elite ipk ii digital multil...

  • Page 1103

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice over internet protocol (voip) 2 - 1079 with a global ip address, connected equipment can be accessed through the internet, so each address must be unique. To avoid a conflict, the addresses are controlled by arin (american registry for internet numbers...

  • Page 1104

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1080 voice over internet protocol (voip) routers when purchasing a router to use with the electra elite ipk ii ip feature, the minimum requirements would be that it provide 10/100 switch and qos. Currently, voip media gateway (mg16) application for the e...

  • Page 1105

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice over internet protocol (voip) 2 - 1081 terminals: ip phone – an electra elite ipk ii ith 4d/8d/16d-2/3 button multiline ip telephone. Ip adapter – an ip adapter connected to a multiline terminal. The telephone with the adapter installed is also called ...

  • Page 1106

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1082 voice over internet protocol (voip) conditions electra elite ipk ii systems can be connected together through a lan using voip. As the ip telephones require a voip resource when receiving a page, the number of ip telephones allowed to receive a page...

  • Page 1107

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice over internet protocol (voip) 2 - 1083 system availability terminals ith-4d/8d/16d-2/3 tel ip adapter required component(s) pva(x)-u( ) etu programming programming – voip mg16 etu these programs are always required with the voip mg16 feature. Programmi...

  • Page 1108

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1084 voice over internet protocol (voip) 84-06-01 voip info – rtp port number for each mg 16 etu, enter the rtp port number (default: 10020). Programming – electra elite ipk ii ip multiline terminal or electra elite ipk ii multiline terminal with ip adap...

  • Page 1109

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice over internet protocol (voip) 2 - 1085 4. Access network settings and press 2 to enter the ip address for the telephone. The ip address must be unique to each telephone, but the range is dependent on system programming (example: ip multiline terminal 1...

  • Page 1110

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1086 voice over internet protocol (voip) programming – using the electra elite ipk ii dhcp 10-13-01 in-dhcp server setup – dhcp server mode enable (1)/disable (0) the system ability to use the built-in dhcp server. The system must be reset for the change...

  • Page 1111

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice over internet protocol (voip) 2 - 1087 2. Access network settings and press 1 to enter the dhcp mode. If not flashing, press 2 to enable the dhcp mode. Press the ok softkey. The flashing item is the current selection. 3. The entries for items 2, 3 and ...

  • Page 1112

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1088 voice over internet protocol (voip) this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 1113: Voice Response System (Vrs)

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice response system (vrs) 2 - 1089 voice response system (vrs) description the dsp daughter board provides the option for the voice response system (vrs) which gives the system voice recording and playback ability. The vrs compactflash card provides up to ...

  • Page 1114

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1090 voice response system (vrs) general message a general message is a recorded message available to all callers. A general message typically contains important company information that all employees should hear. To hear the general message, an employee...

  • Page 1115

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice response system (vrs) 2 - 1091 automatic overflow automatic overflow automatically redirects a call if it cannot go through. This can happen if all vrs ports are busy, if the called extension does not answer, or if the caller misdials or waits too long...

  • Page 1116

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1092 voice response system (vrs) the following programs define the vrs waiting message feature and the trunk overflow: 11-10-20: service code setup (for system administrator) – vrs - record/erase message 15-07: programmable function keys automatic answer...

  • Page 1117

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice response system (vrs) 2 - 1093 the following table shows the available voice prompting messages. Table 2-46 voice prompting messages message no. Message this message will play when . . . 1-00 this is station a user dials 6 for the extension number. 1-0...

  • Page 1118

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1094 voice response system (vrs) 1-19 enter your area code and telephone number an outside caller dials an extension through the automated attendant and the extension is busy. 1-20 please enter your password 1-21 please enter an account code a user tries...

  • Page 1119

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice response system (vrs) 2 - 1095 2-05 one a user dials 6 for the extension number, 8 for the time and date or as part of a spoken code (e.G., 714). 2-06 two 2-07 three 2-08 four 2-09 five 2-10 six 2-11 seven 2-12 eight 2-13 nine 2-14 ten 2-15 eleven 2-16...

  • Page 1120

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1096 voice response system (vrs) 2-33 thousand 2-43 message 2-44 messages 2-64 january 2-65 february 2-66 march 2-67 april 2-68 may 2-69 june 2-70 july 2-71 august 2-72 september 2-73 october 2-74 november 2-75 december 2-76 sunday a user dials 8 for the...

  • Page 1121

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice response system (vrs) 2 - 1097 900 preamble if the system has trunks that are part of a 900 (caller paid) service, the vrs can automatically play a recorded message when a user answers the call. This recorded message should describe the 900 service fea...

  • Page 1122

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1098 voice response system (vrs) default setting disabled system availability terminals not applicable required component(s) dspii-u10 unit programming 11-10-20 service code setup (for system administrator) – vrs - record/erase message define the service...

  • Page 1123

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice response system (vrs) 2 - 1099 20-07-14 class of service options (administrator level) – vrs general message play enable (1)/disable (0) the ability to dial service code 611 and listen to their general message. [default: 0 (cos 1~14) , 1 (cos 15)] 20-0...

  • Page 1124

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1100 voice response system (vrs) 22-14-02 vrs delayed message for irg – 1st waiting message number for each ring group, select the message number to be played as the first message (0~48). This program is also used for vrs waiting message. [default: 0 (no...

  • Page 1125

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice response system (vrs) 2 - 1101 22-15-05 vrs waiting message for department group – 2nd waiting message sending count for each department group, set the number of times the first message is played (0~255). This program is also used for vrs waiting messa...

  • Page 1126

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1102 voice response system (vrs) 25-06-01 vrs/disa one-digit code attendant setup – next attendant message number set up single digit dialing for automated attendant callers. For each vrs message programmed to answer outside calls (see program 25-02-01),...

  • Page 1127

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice response system (vrs) 2 - 1103 40-07-01 voice prompt language assignment for vrs select the language to be used for the vrs. Although the system allows this option to be changed in programming, the language changes only if the dspii-u10 unit has the fi...

  • Page 1128

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1104 voice response system (vrs) 47-03-02 ipk ii in-mail master mailbox options – master mailbox number (version 1600 or higher required) the master mailbox number is the same as the department group master (pilot) number. Select the department group mas...

  • Page 1129

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice response system (vrs) 2 - 1105 you hear the previously recorded message. If you hear a beep instead, no previous message is recorded. 5. Press # to hear the message again. - or - to hear another message, dial 5 and then enter the message number (01~48)...

  • Page 1130

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1106 voice response system (vrs) general message to listen to the general message: multiline terminal only your message waiting led flashes when there is a new general message. A voice message periodically reminds you. 1. Do not lift the handset or press...

  • Page 1131

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c voice response system (vrs) 2 - 1107 to check the system time and date from any multiline terminal extension: 1. Do not lift the handset or press speaker. 2. Dial 8 for time and date. 900 preamble to answer a 900 preamble call: 1. Answer the ringing call. Th...

  • Page 1132

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1108 voice response system (vrs) this page intentionally left blank.

  • Page 1133: Volume Controls

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c volume controls 2 - 1109 volume controls description each multiline terminal user can control the volume of incoming ringing, splash tone, paging, background music, handsfree and your handset. Multiline terminals consolidate all adjustments into the volume b...

  • Page 1134

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1110 volume controls required component(s) none related features electra elite ipk terminals electra elite terminal migration handsfree and monitor off-hook signaling programming 15-02-27 multiline telephone basic data setup – handset volume this option ...

  • Page 1135

    Warning tone for long conversation 2 - 1111 w warning tone for long conversation description the system can broadcast warning tones to a trunk caller, warning the caller that he has been on the call too long. If he chooses, the caller can disregard the tones and continue talking. The outside caller ...

  • Page 1136

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1112 warning tone for long conversation default setting disabled programming 14-01-17 basic trunk data setup – trunk to trunk warning tone for long conversation alarm enable (1)/disable (0) whether or not disa callers should hear the warning tone for lon...

  • Page 1137

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c warning tone for long conversation 2 - 1113 21-01-01 system options for outgoing calls – seizure trunk line mode set the time the (0~64800 seconds) system should wait before starting the warning tone timer. (default: 0) 21-01-03 system options for outgoing c...

  • Page 1138

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1114 warning tone for long conversation toll restriction operation warning tone for long conversation is automatic if programmed. Warning tone for long conversation for disa callers: 1. A disa caller dials into the system and places a call. 2. After the ...

  • Page 1139: Wireless - Dect

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c wireless - dect 2 - 1115 wireless - dect description the wireless – dect (digital enhanced cordless telecommunication) system allows using 2.4 ghz wireless – dect telephones. These telephones provide the freedom and convenience of a wireless telephone but al...

  • Page 1140

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1116 wireless - dect programming pause a long press on adds a pause to predial or phone book numbers. Programming of two different setups each handset can program two profiles to control ring tone and vibrator. One can be an indoor setting; the other, an...

  • Page 1141

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c wireless - dect 2 - 1117 repeater the repeater allows extended coverage for low traffic areas not covered by a base station. Sufficient coverage for the main traffic area should be provided by the base station. An external antenna can also be connected to ex...

  • Page 1142

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1118 wireless - dect this limits the combinations to those shown in the table below: wireless – dect is not supported with acd. Off-hook signaling is not supported for wireless – dect telephones. Default setting none system availability terminals wireles...

  • Page 1143

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c wireless - dect 2 - 1119 related features none programming 10-02-05 location setup – trunk access code 15-14-01 programmable one-touch keys – dial data 15-15-05 wireless – dect terminal basic data setup – voice mail answering when out of range 15-15-06 wirel...

  • Page 1144

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 2 - 1120 wireless - dect placing an outside call with pre-dial: 1. Dial 9. 2. Press and hold the asterisk key to insert a pause (–), if necessary. 3. Dial the outside number. 4. Press the key (on-hook/off-hook)..

  • Page 1145: Codes T

    Features and specifications 3 - 1 codes t a b les 3 codes tables s ection 1 a bout t his c hapter the charts in this chapter provide a list of the service codes, function key codes, and system number plan/capacities. The service codes and function codes are listed by number and by feature in separat...

  • Page 1146

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 2 codes tables s ection 3 u sing h andsfree the manual assumes each extension has automatic handsfree. This lets a user just press a line key or speaker key to answer or place a call. For extensions without automatic handsfree, the user must: lift the ha...

  • Page 1147

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 3 table 3-2 service codes by number dial this service code. . . 1 when you. . . For this feature. . . Also see function key. . . 1 except where indicated, dial service code from intercom dial tone (e.G., press idle speaker key first). + ente...

  • Page 1148

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 4 codes tables 4 + 6 + trunk access code + outside number, or + 6 + hold + hang up to cancel forward your calls to an off- premise telephone number call forwarding off-premise 17 + 7 + record message + # + condition (2, 4, 6 or 7) + destination + type (2...

  • Page 1149

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 5 # 8 set up an unsupervised conference tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) - # 9 + 001 -200 place a call over a specific trunk central office calls, placing 01 + trunk (001~200) 0 (off-hook) leave a message waiting at a co- worker’s b...

  • Page 1150

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 6 codes tables 107 + group number (1~8 or 01~64) cancel dnd for each extension group transfer - 111 are an slt listening to the general message voice response system (vrs) - 112 + 3 to erase, 5 to listen or 7 to record record, listen to or erase the gene...

  • Page 1151

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 7 634 cancel a wake up call for another guest’s room telephone hotel/motel (wake up call) - 635 enable room to room call restriction for a guest’s room telephone hotel/motel (room to room call restriction - 636 disable room to room call rest...

  • Page 1152

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 8 codes tables hookflash + 160 use acd recording for a single line telephone automatic call distribution (acd) - 163 + 6-digit code + line + telephone number override toll restriction toll restriction - - 167 log an agent into their acd group automatic c...

  • Page 1153

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 9 704 + trunk group (1~8 or 1~9 or 001~200) place an outside call over a trunk group central office calls, placing 02 + group 707 override do not disturb or call forwarding call forwarding do not disturb 37 708 step through a department grou...

  • Page 1154

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 10 codes tables 727 + 1 or 2 + time, or 727 + 1 or 2 + 9999 to cancel check, set or cancel an alarm alarm - 728 + hour + minutes set the system time time and date clock/calendar display - 729 check or change ring volume volume control 730 use remote main...

  • Page 1155

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 11 759 retrieve a call from exclusive hold at a slt set. Hold - 760 use did acd access code automatic call distribution (acd) - 762 pick up a call from group hold hold - 763 join a meet me conference or meet me page on an internal paging zon...

  • Page 1156

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 12 codes tables 782 route ani/dnis to the vrs. It can also be used to transfer to vrs. Transfer voice response service (vrs) 783 enable the data communication auto-answer mode data communications - 784 access the vrs voice response service (vrs) - 785 cl...

  • Page 1157

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 13 table 3-3 service codes by feature for this feature... Dial this service code... 1 when you... Also see function key... 1 except where indicated, dial service code from intercom dial tone (e.G., press idle speaker key first). Speed dialin...

  • Page 1158

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 14 codes tables automatic call distribution (acd) 5 log out of or in to an acd group 10 655 log out of or in to an acd group from a single line telephone 656 activate work time from a single line telephone 17 657 cancel work time from a single line telep...

  • Page 1159

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 15 call forwarding, off-premise door box 722 call off-premise with a door box 54 call forwarding/do not disturb override 707 override an extension call forward or dnd setting. 37 call waiting / camp-on 794 split (switching) between calls on ...

  • Page 1160

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 16 codes tables department calling 650 + 0 (install) or 1 (remove) log in (0) or log out (1) for your department calling group 46 department step calling # step call through a department group 36 dial pad confirmation tone 724 enable/disable dial pad con...

  • Page 1161

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 17 hold 732 place a call on group hold - 749 place a call on exclusive hold at a slt set - 759 retrieve a call from exclusive hold at a 2- button telephone - 762 pick up a call from group hold - - hotel/motel (do not disturb) 627 enable dnd ...

  • Page 1162

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 18 codes tables hotel/motel (room status) 639 set room as checked out - - hotel/motel (room status) 641 set a room as available (clean) from another telephone - hotel/motel (room status printouts) 642 request a room status printout - last number redial #...

  • Page 1163

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 19 night service 618 use night mode switching for other group 718 + 1 718 + 2 718 + 3 718 + 4 718 + 5 718 + 6 718 + 7 718 + 8 activate day 1 mode activate night 1 mode activate midnight 1 mode activate rest 1 mode activate day 2 mode activat...

  • Page 1164

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 20 codes tables selectable display messaging 4 + 3 + message (01~20), or 4 + 3 + hang up to cancel activate and canceling selectable display messaging 17 selectable ring tones 711 + 1 (icm) or 2 (trk) + tone (1~8) listen to the incoming ring choices - 72...

  • Page 1165

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 21 transfer 06 set the automatic transfer for each trunk line 07 cancel the automatic transfer for each trunk line 08 set the destination for automatic trunk transfer 602 + group number (1~8 or 01~64) set automatic transfer setup for each ex...

  • Page 1166

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 22 codes tables voice mail 8 (off-hook) leave a message in a co-worker’s mailbox after callback their busy or unanswered extension - 8 call your mailbox 67 654 enable conversation record at slt set - voice over 6 (off-hook) or 790 send a voice over to a ...

  • Page 1167

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 23 table 3-4 function key codes by feature to program a key, press the speaker key, dial 751 (for 2-digit codes) or 752 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter the code (e.G., 48 for voice over). For this feature... Use this key... When...

  • Page 1168

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 24 codes tables automatic call distribution (acd) (cont.) code: 16 operation: press key to put agent on hold. Press key again + 1 to hang up agent or 0 to bring agent back into call. Switch (split) between an acd agent and their outside caller after ans...

  • Page 1169

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 25 call forwarding, immediate code: 10 operation: press key + dest. Extension call forward immediate to extension or voice mail slowly flashes red 741 call forwarding, no answer code: 12 operation: press key + dest. Extension call forward no...

  • Page 1170

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 26 codes tables do not disturb/call forward override code: 37 operation: press key call an extension which is in dnd or call forwarded none - general purpose relay code: 51 + relay number operation: press key activate the general purpose relay on when ac...

  • Page 1171

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 27 memo dial code: 31 operation: store: while on call, press key + number to store use: press key + call or line erase: speaker key + press key store, use or check a memo dial number none - message waiting code: 38 operation: leave message: ...

  • Page 1172

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 28 codes tables park code: 04 + orbit (1~9 or 01~64) operation: place or answer call + press key place a call into or retrieve a call from a park orbit fast flash when orbit is busy (green at originator, red at others) # 6 (park) 6 (pickup) repeat redia...

  • Page 1173

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 29 trunk groups code:02 + trk group (1~9 or 001~200) operation: press key use a trunk group key to access a trunk group on red when active 704 trunk queuing code: 35 operation: hear busy tone for trk + press key camp-on or queue for a trunk...

  • Page 1174

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 30 codes tables table 3-5 function key codes by number to program a key, press speaker key, dial 751 (for 2-digit codes) or 752 (for 3-digit codes), press the key and enter the code (e.G., 48 for voice over). Use this key... For this feature... When you....

  • Page 1175

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 31 code: 12 operation: press key + dest. Ext. Call forwarding, no answer call forwarding to extension or voice mail slowly flashes red 743 code: 13 operation: press key + dest. Ext. Call forwarding, busy/no answer call forwarding to extensio...

  • Page 1176

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 32 codes tables code: 27 operation: press key + bin + line or speaker key speed dialing dial a stored system speed dialing number none # 2 + bin code: 28 operation: press key + bin + line or speaker key dial a stored group speed dialing number none # 4 +...

  • Page 1177

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 33 code: 38 operation: leave message: call ext + press key or answer message: press key message waiting answer/leave a message waiting none 0 or 0 code: 39 operation: press key at destination and source + ext room monitor activate room monit...

  • Page 1178

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 34 codes tables code: 49 + ext or voice mail number operation: press key call redirect redirect an incoming call to an extension or voice mail on red when activated flashes when in dnd/call forward - code: 50 operation: press key account codes enter acco...

  • Page 1179

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c codes tables 3 - 35 code: 02 + trk group (1~9 or 001~200) operation: press key trunk groups use a trunk group key to access a trunk group on red when active 704 code: 03 + ext. Or department group operation: press key call arrival (car) keys call arrival (...

  • Page 1180

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 3 - 36 codes tables code: 10 operation: press key to log in press key + 1 to log out or 0 to cancel automatic call distribution (acd) basic operation log in or out of an acd group on red when logged in off when logged out 5 code: 12 operation: press key em...

  • Page 1181: E A

    Features and specifications 4 - 1 fe at ur e a vaila bility b y softw a re r evision 4 feature availability by software revision s ection 1 f eature a vailability c hart this chapter provides an alphabetical listing of the features that are available with each software revision. Note: the following ...

  • Page 1182

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 4 - 2 feature availability by software revision table 4-1 feature availability by software revision ipk ii feature name ver. 1000 ver. 1100 ver. 1500 ver. 1600 ver. 2000 ver. 2100 account code entry s s s s s s account code – forced/verified/unverified s s s...

  • Page 1183

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c feature availability by software revision 4 - 3 call redirect s s s s s s call waiting/camp-on s s s s s s callback s s s s s s caller id s s s e s e caller id call return s s s s s s central office calls, answering s s s s s s central office calls, placing ...

  • Page 1184

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 4 - 4 feature availability by software revision direct inward line (dil) s s s s s s direct inward system access (disa) s s s s s s direct station selection (dss) console s s e e e s directed call pickup s s s s s s directory dialing s s e e s s distinctive ...

  • Page 1185

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c feature availability by software revision 4 - 5 handsfree answerback/forced intercom ringing s s s s s s headset operation s s s s s s hold s s s s s s hotel/motel s s e e e s hot key-pad n/a n/a s s s s hotline s s s s s s howler tone service s s s s s s in...

  • Page 1186

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 4 - 6 feature availability by software revision long conversation cutoff s s s s s s meet me conference s s s s s s meet me paging s s s s s s meet me paging transfer s s s s s s memo dial s s s s s s message waiting s s s e s s microphone cutoff s s s s s s...

  • Page 1187

    Electra elite ipk ii document revision 4c feature availability by software revision 4 - 7 pulse to tone conversion s s s s s s quick transfer to voice mail s s s e s s redial key s s s s s s remote (system) upgrade s s s s s s repeat redial s s s s s s resident system program s s s s s s reverse voi...

  • Page 1188

    Document revision 4c electra elite ipk ii 4 - 8 feature availability by software revision synchronous ringing s s s s s s t1 trunking (with ani/dnis compatibility) n/a s e s s s tandem ringing s s s s s s tandem trunking (unsupervised conference) s s s s s s tapi compatibility s s e e s s tone overr...

  • Page 1190: Eatures

    F eatures and s pecifications m anual nec unified solutions, inc. Document revision 4c.